MERLIN LEGEND® Communications System Release 6.
Copyright 1998, Lucent Technologie All Rights Reserved Printed in U.S.A. 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change. See Appendix A, “Customer Support Information,” for important information.
Ordering Information Call: Write: BCS Publications Center Voice: 1 800 457-1235 Fax: 1 800 457-1764 International Voice: 1 317 322-6791 International Fax: 1 317 322-6849 BCS Publications Center 2855 North Franklin Road Indianapolis, IN 46219-1385 Order: Document No. 555-660-111 Comcode: 108136086 Issue 1, February 1998 For more information about Lucent Technologies documents, refer to the section entitled ‘‘Related Documents’’ on page -xxi. Support Telephone Number In the continental U.S.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Tables Page xi 0 Tables 1 2 Programming Basics 1–1 Fixed Display Buttons 1-7 1–2 Screen Keys 1-20 1–3 System Programming Menu Options 1-45 1–4 Exiting System Programming 1-46 Programming with SPM 2–1 SPM Configuration File (ams.cfg) Options.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Page xv IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The exclamation point in an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Page xvi ■ The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System requires a supplementary ground. ■ Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it. ■ Slots and openings in the module housings are provided for ventilation.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 About This Book Intended Audience Issue 1 February 1998 Page xvii About This Book The power and versatility of the MERLIN LEGEND Communication System is due in part to its many options and features. These options and features have been recorded on system planning forms and initially programmed at the time of installation.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 About This Book Terms and Conventions Used Issue 1 February 1998 Page xviii In the USA only, Lucent Technologies provides a toll-free customer Helpline (1 800 628-2888) 24 hours a day. Call the Helpline, or your Lucent Technologies representative, if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 About This Book Terms and Conventions Used Page xix Typographical Conventions Certain type fonts and styles act as visual cues to help you rapidly understand the information presented: Example Purpose It is very important that you follow these Italics indicate emphasis. steps. You must attach the wristband before touching the connection. Italics also set off special terms.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 About This Book Security Page xx Security Certain features of the system can be protected by passwords to prevent unauthorized users from abusing the system. You should assign passwords wherever you can and limit knowledge of such passwords to three or fewer people. Nondisplaying authorization codes and telephone numbers provide another layer of security.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 About This Book Related Documents Related Documents Page xxi 0 In addition to this book, the documents listed below are part of the documentation set. Within the continental United States, these can be ordered from the Lucent Technologies Customer Information Center by calling 1 800 457-1235. Document No.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 About This Book How to Comment on This Book Issue 1 February 1998 Page xxii How to Comment on This Book We welcome your comments, both positive and negative. Please use the feedback form on the next page to let us know how we can continue to serve you.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Introduction to System Programming Programming Basics Page 1-1 1 1 This chapter presents the information you need to master before you begin the programming procedures covered in Chapter 3, “Common Administrative Procedures” and Chapter 4, “Programming Procedures.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Introduction to System Programming Page 1-2 1 Planning Forms Before you begin to program or modify your communications system, you should familiarize yourself with the system planning forms. Initially, system planning forms are used to plan your communications system and program your system during installation.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics System Programming Console Page 1-3 — A PC with System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) software. SPM emulates a system programming console on your PC. The PC should be connected to the lower port (labeled ADMIN) on the processor module.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics System Programming Console Console Components Page 1-5 1 Refer to Figure 1–1 for the location of the components described below. MLX-20L Console Components 1 Desk Stand (not shown) An adjustable stand on the console and the DSS, allows a 20- or 30-degree viewing angle. Button Labeling Cards Cards labeled with the number or feature assigned to each line button.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics System Programming Console DSS Components Page 1-6 1 Covers Removable plastic covers to protect the designation cards. The top cover protects the 50 DSS button labels. The lower cover fits over the fixed buttons. DSS Designation Cards Cards for labeling the extension or feature assigned to each button.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics System Programming Console Page 1-7 1 Console Buttons Use the 14 buttons located on either side of the console display area for system programming. These buttons are arranged in two columns of seven buttons, as shown in Figure 1–2. Home MENU MODE: Select Feature Press HOME to Exit Directory Menu More Inspct Messages Posted Msg Alarm Clock Timer Figure 1–2.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics System Programming Console Unlabeled Display Buttons Page 1-8 1 Use the five unlabeled display buttons on each side of the screen to select commands, options, or items on the screen. The functions of these buttons vary, based on the option you select.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Console and DSS Lights Page 1-10 1 The red and green lights (LEDs) next to each of the 20 line buttons show the status of the line/trunk options. LEDs on the DSS show the status of features programmed on extensions. See Appendix C, “LED Displays,” for more information.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Procedure Contents Page 1-11 1 Each procedure begins with a general description of the feature, followed by a summary of programming information that includes the items listed below. Programmable by Indicates who has permission to use the procedure. Mode Specifies which system mode supports the procedure: Key, Hybrid/PBX, Behind Switch, or a combination.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 6\VWHP 6HW XS Page 1-12 Your system information appears in place of the x’s. 5HYLHZ DQG ([LW 6L]H [[[[ 7\SH [[[[ 2SHUDWRU [[[[ [[[[ [[[[ [[[[ [[[[ [[[[ ([LW Figure 1–5. Information Screen You cannot make changes on an information screen. Select ([LW ( to continue to the next screen in the procedure.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures $VVLJQ /LQHV 7UXQNV (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ Page 1-13 Option Selected Prompt Data Entry Area %DFNVSDFH ([LW Figure 1–7. (QWHU Data Entry Screen A data entry screen prompts you to enter specific data or to make specific choices. Data to be entered will be displayed with ns in the text.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Verifying Data Entry Page 1-14 1 You can use the Inspect feature to view the entries you save. An example of how to use the Inspect feature begins with Figure 1–8. The figure shows a data entry screen with the first of two required extension numbers needed to assign analog voice and data.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-15 1 Using the Programming Procedures This section contains specific information about how to make the best use of the programming procedures. Make certain that you read and understand the information presented here before you begin any system programming procedures.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Issue 1 February 1998 Page 1-16 Console/Display Instructions Header 1 In most cases, the screen shown in the console display area contains the results of the previous step. A step with no screen indicates that you should look at the preceding step. The console key that corresponds to the option you are to select is highlighted in black, as shown in sample Step 1 above.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Branching Page 1-17 1 Many of the procedures contain features that have multiple programming options, while other procedures show more than one way to program a particular feature. To accommodate both of these programming methods, the procedures use branching.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-18 The first branch procedure from sample Step 3 is shown below. l AT&T Toll Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify a service.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Issue 1 February 1998 Page 1-19 1 Single or Block Items Branching is also used when you can select between programming a single item or a block of items, such as a single line or a block of lines, as shown in sample Step 5. Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information lu Specify the line(s).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-20 Saving Entries and Moving among Screens 1 At the bottom of each screen are one or more screen keys with functions that allow you to change your entry, save your entry, or return to a previous screen. Various combinations of these screen keys appear on each programming screen.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Table 1–2. Display 1H[W ([LW Page 1-21 Screen Keys (Continued) Key Function Program sequentially numbered items. If you are programming a group of sequentially numbered extensions, lines, or trunks, you may have the option on the PC).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 1-22 Additional Information PC Specify the extension. %,6 +)$, ([WHQVLRQV (QWHU H[WHQVLRQV [[[[ 'HOHWH %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU SP: “Entering an Extension” Assign or remove BIS/HFAI capability. Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-23 1 Using Next When you are programming a feature that can apply to a sequence of extensions, lines/trunks, or groups, the screen key 1H[W appears on the console display. 1H[W ( on the PC) permits you to save your current entry and display the next number in the sequence.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures System Programming Hierarchy Page 1-24 1 The following table shows all of the options that are available under each of the System Programming main menu options displayed on the system programming console. Following the option name is a brief description of the option and the page number where detailed instructions can be found.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Description LinesTrunks Tie Lines * Direction - Two Way - OutGoing - Incoming * Intype - Wink - Delay - Immed - Auto * Outtype - Wink - Delay - Immed - Auto * E&M Signal - Type 1S - Type 1C - Type 5 * Inmode * Outmode * Dialtone * AnsSupvr * Disconnect Issue 1 February 1998 Page 1-29 Page Continued Tie trunks direction 4–121 Signaling type: incoming tie trunk.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Description LinesTrunks - 5ESS Local - OUTWATS - 56/64 Digit - VirtPrivNet - INWATS - MCI Toll - Misc - Other - CallByCall - DMS-100 Local - Legend UDP - ElectTandNwk - Copy Number - Copy PhnNum to NumToSend - Do Not Copy Phone Number - IncomingRtg - Routing by Dial Plan - Route by Line Appearance - Route Directly to UDP * NumberToSend - Extension Only - Base Number with Ext.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Description Options Recall Timer * 350 ms * 450 ms * 650 ms * 1 sec Rotary * Delay * No Delay Inter-Digit Ringing Freq SecDT Timer Issue 1 February 1998 Page 1-39 Page Continued Length of timed flash sent when Recall is used 3–230 Dialed digits on rotary dial trunks 4–36 Not implemented. See “Interdigit Timers” on page –232.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Basics Access to System Programming from the MLX-20L Console Console Display/Instructions ! Page 1-44 Additional Information PC Display the Menu Mode (main menu) screen. $QQH ! .LP $QGUH -RUJH -RVH 6DUDK 6KRZ 1XPEHU 1H[W 3DJH Press Menu. Select System Programming.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Access to System Programming from the MLX-20L Console System Programming Menu Page 1-45 1 Figure 1–11 shows the two screens that make up the System Programming menu. Table 1–3 describes the options. Table 1–3. System Programming Menu Options Option Description System Set system operating conditions.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Idle States Page 1-46 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D 6HOHFWLRQ 0DNH D 6HOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV /DEHOLQJ /DQJXDJH 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 'DWD 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV 3ULQW /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS &QWU 3UJ ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ([LW Figure 1–11.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Idle States Page 1-47 If a procedure requires that the system be idle and the system is busy when you begin, you see the screen shown in Figure 1–12. 6\VWHP %XV\ 3OV :DLW 'LDO &RGH OOOO 6 3 VV SS ([LW nnnn = a previously entered extension ss/pp = the slot and port number of the busy extension (QWHU Figure 1–12.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Idle States Line or Trunk Idle Page 1-48 1 Because these procedures require the line or trunk to be idle only at the instant of programming, the line or trunk is not forced idle (as described in the previous paragraph).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Forced Idle Reminder Tones Page 1-49 1 The forced idle reminder tone is a high-low “doorphone” tone400 ms of 667-Hz tone followed by 400 ms of 571-Hz tone.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-50 MLX-10D, MLX-20L, and MLX-28D display telephones and MLX-10 nondisplay telephones are available in three separate versions, with factory-set buttons in English, Spanish, or French. (The MLX-10DP is available in the English version only.) In addition, user and operator guides and telephone tray cards are available in all three languages.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-51 1 PF Registration PF registration number AS5USA-65646-PF-E is assigned by the FCC for operating the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System in Hybrid/PBX mode in the United States. (The PF registration is also applicable to Release 1.0 systems.) Release 2.0 Enhancements 1 Refer to Release 2.0 Notes for detailed descriptions of Release 2.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-52 ■ When AUDIX Voice Power sends a Leave Message notification to an extension, the system identifies the voice mail system as the sender of the message. When the voice mail subscriber uses the Return Call feature, the call goes to any available voice mail port, not just to the specific port that generated the message.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Issue 1 February 1998 Page 1-54 ■ A call put on hold at a Cover button can be picked up by any person who has a personal line for the call. ■ Calls that have been put on hold at a Cover, SA, Shared SA, or Pool button can be picked up by a person who has a personal line button for the call.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Installation and Hardware Page 1-55 1 Installation and hardware enhancements include the following: ■ The control unit covers for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System are the same easy-to-use covers as those for the MERLIN II Communications System.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Additional Application Packages, Telephones, Adjuncts, and Adapter Page 1-56 1 Additional application packages, adjuncts, and adapter enhancements include the following: ■ A Digital Announcer Unit, compatible with all call management systems and tip/ring applications currently available for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Release 3.0 Enhancements Page 1-57 1 Release 3.0 includes all Release 2.1 functionality plus the enhancements listed below. 1 Equipment New hardware includes a variety of components. Additional details are included elsewhere in this book. ■ CPU modifications include: — A processor running at 16 MHz with a 32-bit wide data bus — 1.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Installation, Upgrade Administration, and Maintenance Page 1-58 1 These are the new MERLIN LEGEND Communications System capabilities: ■ SPM (Release 3.18) conversion of translations from Release 1.0, 1.1, 2.0, and 2.1 to 3.0 ■ Remote operation at 1200/2400bps ■ Advice and feedback administration screens for new Release 3.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Issue 1 February 1998 Page 1-59 Caller ID 1 Caller information (telephone number) is furnished to MLX display telephones by an 800 GS/LS-ID module using the LS (loop-start) option. This allows customers to screen calls before answering the phone, as well as providing calling party information for use with various applications.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Issue 1 February 1998 Page 1-60 Additional Application Packages, Adjuncts, and Adapter Enhancements 1 PassageWay Direct Connection Solution 1 PassageWay Direct Connection Solution (Release 2.0) is a computer telephony integrated product that links a desktop Windows PC to the MERLIN LEGEND Communication System’s MLX-10DP, MLX-20L, or MLX-28D telephone.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Release 3.1 Enhancements Page 1-61 1 Release 3.1 includes all Release 3.0 functionality plus the enhancements listed below. Security Features 1 New security features include a variety of components. Additional details are included elsewhere in this book.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Issue 1 February 1998 Page 1-62 Pool Dial-Out Code Restriction by Default 1 The default setting for the Pool Dial-Out Code restriction has changed to restricted. No extension or remote access user with a barrier code has access to pools until the restriction is removed by the system manager.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Release 4.0 Enhancements Page 1-63 1 Release 4.0 includes all Release 3.1 functionality plus the enhancements listed below: Equipment 1 1 016 Tip/Ring Module This module supports the 200-extension dial plan by providing 16 ports for tip/ring devices. Applications that use a tip/ring interface can connect to this board. All 16 ports can ring simultaneously.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-64 Support for T1 Digital Data Transmission 1 Release 4.0 expands its T1 functionality by providing access to digital data over the public switched 56 kbps network in addition to data Tie-Trunk services.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-65 1 Single-Line Telephone Enhancements ■ Disable Transfer. Through centralized telephone programming, the system manager can disable the ability to transfer calls by removing from the telephone all but one SA or ICOM button. ■ No Transfer Return.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Night Service with Coverage Control Page 1-66 1 Beginning with Release 4.1, a system manager can enable the Night Service Coverage Control option to automatically control the status of telephones programmed with Coverage VMS (voice messaging system) Off buttons, according to Night Service status.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Maintenance Testing for BRI Facilities that Are Part of Multiline Hunt Groups (MLHGs) Page 1-67 1 Beginning with Release 4.1, the NI-1 BRI (National Integrated Services Digital Network-1 Basic Rate Interface) Provisioning Test Tool is enhanced to include testing for BRI facilities that are part of Multiline Hunt Groups (MLHGs).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements MERLIN LEGEND Reporter Page 1-69 1 MERLIN LEGEND Reporter provides basic call accounting system reports for all incoming calls to Auto Login or Auto Logout type calling groups.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Release 5.0 Enhancements Page 1-70 1 Release 5.0 includes all Release 4.2 functionality, plus the enhancements listed below.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-71 1 Screen Pop Screen pop occurs when the calling number, called number, or other user-defined identifier (such as account code that a voice-response unit prompts the caller to dial) is used to display a screen associated with the far-end party.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements HotLine Feature Page 1-72 1 The Release 5.0 HotLine feature is designed for retail sales, catalogue sales, and other types of businesses and organizations and is available in all three modes of system operation. It allows a system manager to program a single-line telephone extension connected to an 008 OPT, 012, or 016 module as a HotLine.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Issue 1 February 1998 Page 1-73 Delay Announcement Devices 1 The system manager can designate as many as ten primary delay announcement devices per group rather than the single device for each group that is available in Release 4.2 and earlier systems.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements ■ Page 1-74 If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the highest value, Threshold 3, the LED lights steadily. NOTE: A DSS (Direct Station Selector) button that is used as a Calls-in-Queue Alarm button can only indicate two threshold levels, either by flashing or by lighting steadily.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Issue 1 February 1998 Page 1-75 Available for Hybrid/PBX mode systems, the private network features of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 provide the following advantages for geographically dispersed organizational sites: ■ Intersystem Calling. In a private network, users on one local system can call extensions on other systems in the network. Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-76 — You order a point to point T1 facility from a service provider, then use system programming to set it up for PRI signalling. As necessary, a service provider can provide amplification on the T1 facility, but does not supply switching services.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-77 Queue control also applies to internal calls to a DGC group and calls to a calling group through the QCC. Internal calls that dial or and are directed to a calling group administered as Position-Busy Backup are eligible for queue control.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 1 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-78 ■ The system must be equipped with analog loop-start Centrex lines and all loop-start lines in the system must be Centrex facilities. Loop-start lines do not have to provide reliable disconnect for use by the Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding feature.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Page 2-1 Programming with SPM 2 2 The System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) software package offers an alternate method of programming the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System using a PC.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM System Requirements Page 2-2 This book describes the use of SPM on a PC with a DOS operating system. If your system includes the Intuity or IS II/III applications, you have the UNIX System version of SPM. For information about accessing SPM from the IS II/III application, refer to the following books: ■ Integrated Solution III System Manager’s Guide, order no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software ■ Page 2-3 Direct local connection, if the PC is more than 50 ft. from the control unit.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-4 2 DOS Installation Use the following procedure to install SPM on the hard drive of a DOS PC. NOTE: If you are updating SPM, you do not need to remove the current SPM files. The new files will overwrite your current SPM files. 2 Considerations Review the following items before you begin the installation procedure.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software ■ Page 2-5 Creates the following directories if they do not already exist: — c:\spm\backup — c:\spm\reports — c:\spm\tmp ■ Does one of the following: — Creates the SPM configuration file c:\spm\ams.cfg, if it does not already exist. In this case, the ams.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software DOS Installation with Windows 95 Page 2-6 2 Using DOS SPM with Windows 95 improves the interaction of SPM with the operating system as compared to Windows 3.x installation. For example, the interaction with the print driver is improved.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-7 2 Installation With Windows 95 running on your PC, follow these steps to install SPM on the PC’s hard drive: 1. Insert a backup copy of SPM in any floppy disk drive (usually the A drive). 2. Choose one of the following two methods to install SPM: Method 1– Install DOS SPM with French, Spanish, or English Language: a.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software 5. Issue 1 February 1998 Page 2-8 If your PC does not have a copy of PRINT.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Configuring a PIF file for DOS SPM Page 2-9 2 Refer to the Windows 95 Help topic, “PIF editor,” for details about using the PIF editor to implement an SPM PIF file to work with the spm.exe file. Configure a PIF file for DOS SPM by doing the following: 1. In the Windows Explorer, select the SPM application file.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-10 < NOTE: The DEBUG attribute is also specified in ams.cfg as '(%8* 2 (off), the default setting, or '(%8* (on). This attribute is used to enable the Escapeto-Shell feature of SPM, activated by pressing + . To turn DEBUG on, you must edit the ams.cfg file; it is not part of the initialization process.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software 1 Page 2-11 The screens shown in Steps 3 through 7 appear only if the system has not been initialized. Otherwise, the screen shown in Step 8 appears. ! Select the serial communications port used for SPM and press &200 3257 &RPP . Type for serial port 1 (COM1). Type for serial port 2 (COM2).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-12 The language you select here becomes the SPM (PC) language. ! Review your selections. 630 &21),*85$7,21 x = the values entered for each entry in Steps 3 through 6 &RPP 3RUW Y 6SHHG Y &RORU Y 'HVLUH FKDQJH \ Q " 1 1 ■ To change any of the information shown, type and press screen shown in Step 3 appears.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Connecting the PC Page 2-13 2 Connecting the PC There are three ways to connect the PC to the control unit. Choose the method below that is most useful for your installation. ■ Direct local connection ■ Local modem connection ■ Remote modem connection 2 Direct Local Connection For a direct local connection, you must connect the PC to the system programming jack.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Connecting the PC Page 2-15 2 Local Modem Connection For a local modem connection, you must use a modem (either connected to, or built into, the PC) to access the internal modem in the control unit. Connect the modem to an 012 or 016 module in the control unit, as shown in Figure 2–3.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM Page 2-16 008 MLX 8 MLX (Digital) Telephones 408 PROCESSOR Serial Communications Port 012 Incoming trunk line Public or private telephone network 408 GS/LS 44GS or LS Outside Lines/ 8 Analog Telephones (ATL) 2 RS-232 MODEM POWER CAUTIO N ON OFF Turn poweoff insertr befor remo ing or e moduving les AG INPUT FR GND Figure 2–4.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM ! Page 2-17 Set up the appropriate physical connections between the PC and the control unit. See “Connecting the PC” on page 13. ! If you installed SPM on the hard disk of the PC, go to Step 5. ! If the PC does not have a hard disk, insert the SPM diskette into Drive A. ! Type B and press $ ! ! 1 1 . appears on the screen.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM With a Local or Remote Modem Connection Page 2-18 2 The method you use to access SPM by modem depends on whether you are programming on site (locally) or from a remote location. ■ If you are on site, the modem must be connected to an 012 or 016 module on the control unit. To establish a connection to the control unit’s internal modem, dial .
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 1 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM Page 2-19 ■ The password prompt appears on the screen when the connection is made. (You may have to press more than once to get the password prompt.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM ! Page 2-20 Type the SPM password to display the SPM Main Menu shown in Step 6. (QWHU 3DVVZRUG The password does not display as you type it. ! To select an option, press the function key that corresponds to the option you . want.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-21 2 Using SPM This section describes how to use the SPM screens, SPM Help, and the SPM options listed below.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM Figure 2–5. Issue 1 February 1998 Page 2-22 SPM Display through , and through display on either side of the console simulation window. They represent the function keys to use when you select screen options. When a screen contains several choices, press the function key identified by the label next to your choice.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM Table 2–2. PC Key 7%/%I 7%/%P 7%/%Z 7%/%R 7%/%F 7%/%<%/% <%/% <%/% Page 2-23 Function of PC Keys in SPM Console SPM Function Home Quit. Exit from SPM and return to the DOS prompt when you finish with system programming. If you are using a modem, the call is disconnected. Menu Return to the SPM Main Menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM Table 2–2. <%/% PC Key 1 3 9 % %%%# Issue 1 February 1998 Page 2-24 Continued Console SPM Function n/a Escape to shell. To use this key sequence, you must set DEBUG=1 in the configuration file ams.cfg. You can then use this key sequence to execute DOS (or UNIX System) commands. To return to SPM, type FYJU.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-25 2 SPM Main Menu Options The SPM Main Menu provides access to system programming and to the SPM functions listed in Table 2–3. Table 2–3.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-26 2 SPM Help < To access the SPM help screens, press To review the help screens press, To return to the first help screen, press To exit from SPM help, press + and . . . A typical help screen is shown in Figure 2–6. Figure 2–6. SPM Help .
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-27 2 Backup The Backup procedure is used by qualified service personnel to create a file of system programming information either in the \spm\backup directory (on the hard drive of the PC) or in the root directory of a diskette (on the floppy disk drive of the PC). NOTE: Back up your system programming information on a regular basis.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-28 2 Considerations Review the following items before you begin the backup procedure: ■ The communications system does not have to be idle during backup; however, extension programming is blocked. ■ Any objects that are in a maintenance-busy state are stored in that state.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 2-29 1 Remove the SPM diskette and insert a formatted diskette. Use the arrow keys to . highlight *272 )/233< and press 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ IRU WKH %$&.83 ILOH *272 )/233< 0$.( 1(: ),/( 0$.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM ! Page 2-30 Verify that the filename chosen does not already exist. The following screen appears only if the filename chosen already exists. Continue with Step 7 if this screen does not appear. 0 7KH ILOH DOUHDG\ H[LVWV ,I \RX FRQWLQXH WKH ROG YHUVLRQ ZLOO EH GHOHWHG Press to abort the backup. Go to Step 1 to create a different backup file.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM ! To abort the backup press 0 Page 2-31 to return to the SPM Main Menu. 3UHVV (6& WR $ERUW (VW %ORFNV YYY - YYYY ILOHQDPH %$&.83 ,1 352*5(66 ;02'(0 $%257 8VHU ! When the backup is complete, press %DFNXS VXFFHVVIXO 1 to return to the SPM Main Menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-32 NOTE: If you remove a board but do not replace it, and then perform a board renumber, the control unit will not recognize any boards that follow the empty slot. You must reseat all of the boards to fill the empty slot before you perform the board renumber. The Inspect function ( ) lets you see which modules have been assigned to slots on the control unit.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-33 Follow the steps below to assign modules. ! At the SPM Main Menu, press to select %RDUGV. 630 0DLQ 0HQX 0HQX 6HOHFW )XQFWLRQ ! 6\V 3URJUDP 0DLQWHQDQFH %DFNXS 5HVWRUH %RDUGV 3DVV 7KUX 3ULQW 2SWV 3DVVZRUG 0RQLWRU /DQJXDJH Press the function key that corresponds to the module you want to select.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM ! Page 2-34 Assign or remove the module from the slot entered in Step 3. PRGXOH QDPH module name = option selected in Step 2 nn = slot entered in Step 3 (QWHU VORW QXPEHUV QQ 'HOHWH %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU To remove the module type from the specified slot number, press Boards menu reappears.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-35 2 Browse The Browse option allows you to browse through reports saved in the Reports directory (\spm\reports) on the hard disk of the PC or on a floppy. ! At the SPM Main Menu press < + . *272 )/233< 3OHDVH HQWHU ILOH QDPH ),/(1$0( ;;; ),/(1$0( <<< 3UHVV (6& WR $ERUW FILENAME.XXX and FILENAME.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-36 2 Convert The Convert option (which can be used remotely) simplifies upgrading from an earlier release to a current release of the communications system (see “Upgrading the System” on page 2–57). This procedure should be done only by qualified service personnel.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM ! At the SPM Main Menu, press 7 Page 2-37 + F to begin the conversion. 630 0DLQ 0HQX 0HQX 6HOHFW )XQFWLRQ ! 6\V 3URJUDP 0DLQWHQDQFH %DFNXS 5HVWRUH %RDUGV 3DVV 7KUX 3ULQW 2SWV 3DVVZRUG 0RQLWRU /DQJXDJH Follow the instructions for a floppy or a hard disk.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 1 Programming with SPM Using SPM ! Page 2-38 Use the arrow keys to highlight the name of the backup file to be converted and press . ■ If the backup file you select is a 6.0 backup, it cannot be converted. The following message appears: 1 )LOH KDV DOUHDG\ EHHQ FRQYHUWHG 3UHVV (QWHU WR FRQWLQXH Press procedure.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM ! Use the arrow keys to highlight *272 )/233< and press 3OHDVH VHOHFW ILOH QDPH WR FRQYHUW WR, RU VHOHFW *272 )/233< 0$.( 1(: ),/( 1(: ),/( WR FUHDWH D QHZ ),/(1$0( ;;; ILOH RQ VHOHFWHG GULYH. ),/(1$0( <<< 1 Issue 1 February 1998 Page 2-39 . (QWHU )LOHQDPH 1 After you press , the *272 )/233< statement shown above changes to *272 +$5' ',6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-40 The converted file cannot have the same name as the file from which you converted. If you specify the same filename, the following screen appears: ,I \RX FRQWLQXH, WKH ROG YHUVLRQ ZLOO EH GHOHWHG SUHVV (6& WR DERUW, RU F WR FRQWLQXH. Press ! 1 and repeat this step.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-41 2 Language A language attribute in the SPM configuration file \spm\ams.cfg (DOS version) or /usr/ams/ams.cfg (UNIX System version) specifies whether SPM menus, pop-up windows, and other messages are presented in English, French, or Spanish.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM ! Page 2-42 Press the function key that corresponds to your language selection. 'LVSOD\ /DQJXDJH 0DNH D 6HOHFWLRQ (QJOLVK )UHQFK 6SDQLVK ([LW The Display Language screen reappears, with the language you selected. ! Press to return to the SPM Main Menu or select another language.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Programming with SPM Using SPM Direct Connection 012 408 GS/LS 44GS or LS Outside Lines/ 8 Analog Telephones (ATL) 008 MLX 8 MLX (Digital) Telephones 408 Page 2-43 PROCESSOR 2 Remote Connection POWER CAUTION ON OFF Turn off power before inserting removingor modules AG INPUT FR GND Control Unit IS II/III PC Figure 2–7.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM Issue 1 February 1998 Page 2-44 If the IS II/III PC does not respond to the Pass-Thru request from the control unit (for example, because the PC is turned off), you see the following message: 3DVV WKUX IDLOHG 3OHDVH WU\ DJDLQ If the connection between the control unit and the IS II/III PC fails, the connection between the control unit and the SPM PC is dropped.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM ! Type the IS II/III password and press 1 Page 2-45 . 3DVVZRUG ! Type ams for the terminal emulation type and press 1 . 8QL[ GLVN XVDJH LQIRUPDWLRQ 7HUP ! ■ If you are working with IS II, the IS II main menu appears. ■ If you are working with IS III, the system prompts you for your login registration.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM ! At the SPM Main Menu, press Page 2-46 to select 3DVVZRUG. 630 0DLQ 0HQX 0HQX 6HOHFW )XQFWLRQ ! 6\V 3URJUDP 0DLQWHQDQFH %DFNXS 5HVWRUH %RDUGV 3DVV 7KUX 3ULQW 2SWV 3DVVZRUG 0RQLWRU /DQJXDJH Type the old (current) password. Do not press 1 .
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM ! Type the new password again. Do not press 1 Page 2-47 . 3DVVZRUG (QWHU 1HZ 3DVVZRUG DJDLQ 1HZ 3DVVZRUG LQ XVH ! Press to return to the SPM Main Menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM ! Select the target device for the reports. 3ULQWHU 2SWLRQV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 60'5 3RUW 3& 3RUW ([LW ! Page 2-48 Press to return to the SPM Main Menu. SMDR Port Output 2 See “Printing System Reports” on page –273 for more information about the print procedure using the system console and the SMDR port.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Using SPM ! Use the arrow keys to highlight *272 )/233< and press 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ IRU WKH 5(6725( ILOH 1 Page 2-50 . *272 )/233< EDFNXS DPV ILOH ,I XSJUDGLQJ FRQYHUW ILOH ILOHV EHIRUH UHVWRULQJ 3UHVV (6& WR $ERUW 1 After you press , the *272 )/233< statement shown above changes to *272 +$5' ',6.. Go to Step 5. ! Specify the filename to restore from.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM System Programming ! When the restore completes, press 5HVWRUH VXFFHVVIXO 1 Page 2-51 to return to the SPM Main Menu. xxxx = number of blocks sent 3OHDVH SUHVV (QWHU WR VHH WKH 0DLQ 0HQX 6HQW YYYY %ORFNV 2 System Programming A primary function of SPM is to provide a method for programming the communications system.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM System Programming Page 2-52 In most cases, you will be at an intermediate step in the procedure you have just completed. At that point, you can select one of the options shown on the screen and continue programming, or you can press ([LW ( ) again. This usually takes you back to the System Programming menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM System Programming Page 2-54 2 Forced Idle Reminder Tone The forced idle reminder tone is a high-low “door-phone” tone400 ms of 667 Hz tone followed by 400 ms of 571 Hz tone.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM System Programming Page 2-55 2 Printing Reports Use the following procedure to print system reports using SPM at the PC. The SPM 3ULQW 2SWV must be set to 3& 3RUW. See “Print Options” on page 2–47 for details about setting the printer output port. ! ! ! At the second page of the System Programming menu, press 3ULQW.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM System Programming ! Page 2-56 Observe the print status screen. 3ULQW LQ 3URJUHVV ([LW You can press to interrupt printing and return to the SPM Main Menu. 2 Print Hard Copy 1 To print a hard copy of the report, use the arrow keys to highlight /37 and press .
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Upgrading the System ! Page 2-57 2 WARNING: The following procedures are to be used by qualified technicians or service personnel only. Installation or maintenance of this product by anyone other than qualified personnel may damage or impair the product; your limited warranty does not cover such damage.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-58 2 Before You Begin Before you begin the upgrade to Release 6.0, you will need the items listed below. ■ SPM Version 6.15 or later to back up and convert system programming information and to restore system programming information after the processor module has been upgraded.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Table 2–6. SPM Page 2-59 Programming Compatibility Program Restore on Version Backup from 1.0 1.1 2.0/2.1 3.0 3.1 4.0 4.1/4.2 5.0 6.0 1.13 1.0 yes no no no no no no no no 1.16 1.0 yes yes no no no no no no no * 2.09 1.0 yes yes yes no no no no no no 2.16 1.0 yes yes yes* no no no no no no 3.18 1.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2 Table 2–6. SPM Page 2-60 Continued Program Restore on Version Backup from 1.0 1.1 2.0/2.1 3.0 3.1 4.0 4.1/4.2 5.0 6.0 2.16 2.1 no no no no no no no no no 3.18 2.1 no no no yes* yes* no no no no 4.15 2.1 no no no yes* yes* yes* no no no 4.25 2.1 no no no yes* yes* yes* yes* no no 5.15 2.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-61 NOTE: The default barrier code and any programmed barrier codes from Release 2.1 and earlier are carried over to Release 3.0 and later with no change and the barrier code length is four (4). It is the responsibility of the system manager to change the barrier code length and the barrier codes if so desired.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System ! Page 2-62 Insert the forced installation memory card into the PCMCIA interface slot on the processor module. NOTE: Using the forced installation memory card will cause a frigid start.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System ■ Issue 1 February 1998 Page 2-63 Table 2–10. Lists the features added with Release 3.1 of the communications system. — When you upgrade from Release 3.0 to Release 3.1, you must program these features as the last step of the upgrade procedure. — When you upgrade from Release 2.0 or 2.1 to Release 3.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Issue 1 February 1998 Page 2-64 — When you upgrade from Release 3.0 to Release 4.1, you must program the features listed in Table 2–10, then the features listed in Table 2–11, then the features listed in Table 2–12. — When you upgrade from Release 2.0 or 2.1 to Release 4.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Issue 1 February 1998 Page 2-65 — When you upgrade from Release 1.0 to Release 4.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System ■ Issue 1 February 1998 Page 2-66 Table 2–15. Lists the features added with Release 6.0 of the communications system. — When you upgrade from Release 5.0 to Release 6.0, you must program the features listed in Table 2–15. — When you upgrade from Release 4.2 to Release 6.0, you must program the features listed in Table 2–14, then the features listed in Table 2–15.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Table 2–7. Page 2-67 Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 1.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Table 2–8. Page 2-68 Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 2.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Table 2–9. Issue 1 February 1998 Page 2-69 Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 3.0 Feature Sequence Automatic Backup 6\V3URJUDP→6\VWHP→%DFN 5HVWRUH →$XWR %DFNXS Incoming Call Line Identification Delay /LQHV7UXQNV→More→/6 ,' 'HOD\ →Drop→Dial trunk no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-70 Table 2–11. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.0 Feature Sequence Delayed Call Forwarding ([WHQVLRQV→More→'HOD\ )UZG →Dial ext. no.→ (QWHU→Dial no. of delay rings→(QWHU Group Calling Overflow and Thresholds ([WHQVLRQV→More→*US &DOOLQJ→2YHUIORZ→Dial calling group ext. no.→(QWHU→Dial ext. no.→(QWHU→1XPEHU %DVHG 2YHUIORZ→Drop→Dial no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-71 Table 2–12. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Issue 1 February 1998 Page 2-72 Table 2–12. Continued Feature Sequence Switched 56 Data To select T1 All Tie: Switched 56 Data: /LQHV7UXQNV →/6 *6 '6 →Dial slot no.→ (QWHU→7\SH→7 →(QWHU→$OO 7,(→(QWHU→6 → (QWHU→Dial channel no.→(QWHU→([LW→ ([LW→([LW→([LW To select T1 Tie: Switched 56 Data: /LQHV7UXQNV →/6 *6 '6 →Dial slot no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-73 Table 2–13. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.2 Feature SMDR Talk Time PRI Switch Types Sequence 2SWLRQV→60'5→7DON 7LPH →(QDEOH or 'LVDEOH→ (QWHU→([LW→([LW To select the Nortel DMS-250 for MCI services: 6\V3URJUDP →([LW→/LQHV7UXQNV →35,→ 6ZLWFK7\SH →Dial slot no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-74 Table 2–13. Continued Feature PRI Call-by-Call Services Table Sequence To select MCI Toll Call-by-Call Services for a DMS-250 or DEX600E switch type: 6\V3URJUDP →([LW→/LQHV7UXQNV →35,→ 2XWJRLQJ7EO→&%& 6HUYLFH →1HWZRUN6HUY →List no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Issue 1 February 1998 Page 2-75 Table 2–14. Continued Feature Calling Group Alarm Thresholds Sequence ([WHQVLRQV→More→*US &DOOLQJ→4XHXH $ODUP → Dial calling group ext. no.→(QWHU→$ODUP 7KUHVKROG or $ODUP 7KUHVKROG or $ODUP 7KUHVKROG → Drop→Dial no. of calls→(QWHU→([LW→([LW HotLine ([WHQVLRQV→More→More→+RW/LQH→ Dial HotLine ext. no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-76 Table 2–15. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 2 Programming with SPM Surrogate Mode Programming Surrogate Mode Programming Page 2-77 2 Surrogate mode allows qualified service personnel to perform system programming at an off-site service location. The actual communications system hardware does not have to be installed—the programmer needs only a direct connection from the PC to the processor module.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Page 3-1 Common Administrative Procedures 3 3 This chapter contains procedures for all of the common administrative tasks performed by the system manager in response to changes in business requirements. The procedures described in this chapter are defined briefly below: ■ Change Basic System Operating Conditions.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Page 3-2 ■ Telephone Line Button Assignments and Optional Telephone Features. Use these procedures to assign outside lines/trunks to the buttons on a telephone, to copy these line/trunk assignments to additional telephones, and to assign System Access or Intercom buttons.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-3 3 The procedures in this section are all related to the system rather than to the operation of extensions, operator positions, lines, or trunks. NOTE: You must reset the system time when Daylight Savings Time begins and ends.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-4 Factory Setting First extension jack on the first MLX module (also set as an operator position) Valid Entries Extension number of one of the first five extension jacks on the first MLX module Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure 6\VWHP→63URJ 3RUW→Drop→Dial ext. no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-5 Additional Information PC Enter the new extension. Ã SP: “Entering an Extension” ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-6 Console Procedure More→/DQJXDJH→6\VWHP/DQJ→
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-7 Additional Information Select a system language. (The default is English.) Select (QJOLVK, )UHQFK, or 6SDQLVK. 6\VWHP /DQJXDJH 6HOHFW RQH (QJOLVK )UHQFK 6SDQLVK ([LW ! PC (QWHU Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-9 Additional Information Enter six digits for the current date. Ã Dial or type [mmddyy]. ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Return to the System Programming menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-10 Valid Entries 0000 to 2359 Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure 6\VWHP→7LPH→Drop→Dial current time→(QWHU→([LW PC Procedure 7 → → + I→Type current time→ → 3 Procedure: Set System Time Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the System menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-11 Additional Information PC Enter four digits for the current time. Ã Dial or type [hhmm]. Use 24-hour (military) notation (for example, enter 11:30 p.m. as 2330). Use leading zeros if necessary (for example, enter 4 a.m. as 0400). ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-12 Use the single renumbering procedure any time the extension numbers you are changing from or to are not sequential. Block renumbering is quicker, but you can use block renumbering only when the extension numbers you are changing from and to are sequential.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-14 3 Single Renumbering Use this procedure to assign a specified extension number to a telephone, accessory, line, pool (Hybrid/PBX only), calling group, paging group, or Listed Directory Number.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select Single renumbering. 6\VWHP 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 'HIDXOW 1XPEHULQJ 6LQJOH %ORFN 1RQ/RFDO 8'3 ([LW ! Page 3-15 If you get the System Busy message, wait for an idle condition or exit system programming and try again later. Review the menu options.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Console Display/Instructions ! ! Page 3-16 Additional Information PC Enter the new extension. YYYY (QWHU QHZ QXPEHU **** = item selected in Step 4 xxxx = extension entered in Step 5 %DFNVSDFH ([LW SP: “Entering an Extension” 1H[W (QWHU Ã Save your entry. Select (QWHU or 1H[W.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-17 Planning Form Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks Form 2b, System Numbering: Digital Adjuncts Form 2d, System Numbering: Special Renumbers Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries Old and new extension numbers Inspect Yes Copy Option Yes Console Procedure 6\V5HQXPEHU →%ORFN→Select type of group→Dial no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Console Display/Instructions ! Select /LQHV, ([WHQVLRQV , or $GMXQFWV. ([LW %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU = option name selected in Step 3 SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry. Ã Select (QWHU. ! PC Enter the currently assigned number for the first member of the group.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information %DFNVSDFH ([LW nnnn = number entered in Step 6 = option name selected in Step 3 Ã (QWHU Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Enter the new extension number. 6WDUW $W OOOO (QWHU QHZ QXPEHU ! Page 3-19 Return to the System Programming menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-20 network UDP calls. Therefore, these techniques should not be used except in special cases for non-local private network UDP calls. Deleting and prepending digits are very useful methods and are easily set up for routing non-local dial plan calls over the PSTN, if necessary.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering ■ Page 3-21 Enter the last four digits and use UDP routing to prepend the first digit in the DEFINITY extension number. The local system recognizes the number range using the last four digits. Users dial only the last four digits.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-22 Console Procedure 6\V5HQXPEHU →1RQ/RFDO 8'3→Dial no. of first extension in range→(QWHU→Dial no. of last extension in range→ (QWHU→Dial no. of pattern for extension range→ (QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure Procedure: Specifying New Extension Ranges Console Display/Instructions ! → →Type no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-23 Additional Information %DFNVSDFH ([LW 'HO5DQJH (QWHU nnnn = number entered in Step 3 If the range conflicts with existing number(s) on the local system or is a starting or intermediate number for a remote system, check the system planning forms and try again.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-24 3 Deleting Extension Ranges This procedure deletes the numbering for specified extension ranges of a nonlocal system and can be used, for example, to prepare for renumbering local or remote system extensions.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Renumbering Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-25 Additional Information PC Select Non-local renumbering. 6\VWHP 5HQXPEHU 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 'HIDXOW 1XPEHULQJ 6LQJOH %ORFN 1RQ/RFDO 8'3 ([LW ! Dial or type the first number in the range of extensions to delete.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Operator Positions System Operator Positions Page 3-26 3 Use the following procedures either to add an operator position or to change an existing operator position. The Queued Call Console (QCC) operator position is available only for Hybrid/ PBX systems.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Operator Positions Page 3-27 3 Primary Operator Positions The primary operator position is the extension to which your call is directed when 0 is dialed on a System Access button. The first extension jack on the first MLX module in your system is assigned as the primary operator position.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Operator Positions Page 3-28 Valid Entries First or fifth extension jack on MLX module (maximum: two per module; four QCCs per system) Inspect Yes Copy Option No Console Procedure 2SHUDWRU →3RVLWLRQV →4XHXHG &DOO→Dial ext. no.→ (QWHU→6WRUH $OO PC Procedure → Procedure: QCC Operator Positions Console Display/Instructions ! → →Type ext. no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Operator Positions Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify the QCC extension as a QCC position. 4&& 2SHUDWRU 3RVLWLRQV (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ 6WRUH $OO %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! Page 3-29 'HOHWH (QWHU Ã If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required. Go to Step 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Operator Positions Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-31 Additional Information PC Select Direct-Line Console (DLC). 6\VWHP 2SHUDWRU 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 'LUHFW /LQH 4XHXHG &DOO If you get the System Busy message, wait for an idle condition or exit system programming and try again later. ([LW ! Specify the DLC extension as a DLC position.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Operator Features Page 3-32 3 Optional Operator Features The procedures in this section affect feature programming for both DLC and QCC operator positions and include the following: ■ Operator Hold Timer ■ DLC Operator Automatic Hold QCC operator features are covered in the next section.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Operator Features Page 3-33 3 Procedure: Operator Hold Timer Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Operator menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select Hold Timer.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Operator Features Page 3-34 3 DLC Operator Automatic Hold Use this procedure to enable or disable the DLC Operator Automatic Hold feature for DLC operator positions. When this feature is enabled, it prevents accidental call disconnection.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-35 Additional Information Specify whether to enable or disable automatic hold. '/& $XWR +ROG 6HOHFW RQH $XWR +ROG (QDEOH $XWR +ROG 'LVDEOH ([LW ! (QWHU Select $XWR +ROG (QDEOH or $XWR +ROG 'LVDEOH . Save your entry. Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-36 3 Hold Return Use this procedure to determine whether calls on hold are returned to the QCC queue or remain on hold, on the QCC operator console, after the hold timer has expired twice. After the hold timer expires the first time, the operator hears an abbreviated ring as a call-on-hold reminder.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Procedure: Hold Return Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-37 3 Additional Information Select the Operator menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select Queued Call.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-38 Additional Information PC Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-39 Additional Information Select Hold Release. 4XHXHG &DOO 2SHUDWRU ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ +ROG 5WUQ ,Q4XH $OHUW +ROG5HOHDVH &DOO 7\SHV 7KUHVKROG 0VJ &HQWHU (OYDWH3ULRU ([WQG&RPSOW ([LW 5HWXUQ 5LQJ ! Specify whether in-progress calls are automatically put on hold or disconnected when another Call button is pressed.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-40 3 Queue over Threshold Use this procedure to specify the maximum number of calls (threshold) in the QCC queue before system operators are notified with a tone that the threshold has been reached or exceeded. If the threshold is set to 0, operators are not notified.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-41 Additional Information PC Select Threshold. 4XHXHG &DOO 2SHUDWRU ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ +ROG 5WUQ ,Q4XH $OHUW +ROG5HOHDVH &DOO 7\SHV 7KUHVKROG 0VJ &HQWHU (OYDWH3ULRU ([WQG&RPSOW ([LW 5HWXUQ 5LQJ ! Issue 1 February 1998 Erase the current threshold (xx).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-42 3 Elevate Priority Use this procedure to specify the length of time before calls waiting in the QCC queue are automatically reprioritized to a higher level. If priority is set to 0, calls are not prioritized.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-43 Additional Information Select Elevate Priority. 4XHXHG &DOO 2SHUDWRU ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ +ROG 5WUQ ,Q4XH $OHUW +ROG5HOHDVH &DOO 7\SHV 7KUHVKROG 0VJ &HQWHU (OYDWH3ULRU ([WQG&RPSOW ([LW 5HWXUQ 5LQJ ! PC Select Queued Call.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-44 3 Calls-In-Queue Alert Use this procedure to specify whether each QCC operator is notified (with a single beep) when a new call enters the QCC queue.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-45 Additional Information Select In-Queue Alert. 4XHXHG &DOO 2SHUDWRU ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ +ROG 5WUQ ,Q4XH $OHUW +ROG5HOHDVH &DOO 7\SHV 7KUHVKROG 0VJ &HQWHU (OYDWH3ULRU ([WQG&RPSOW ([LW 5HWXUQ 5LQJ ! Enter the QCC extension to receive the calls-in-queue alert.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-46 Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU or 1H[W Use 1H[W to program the next QCC position. The next QCC operator is displayed on Line 1. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW two times.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-47 4. Programming an operator position to receive DID calls to invalid destinations does not cause the calls to ring into the QCC queue unless you program such calls to be sent to a backup extension. “Invalid Destination” on page 4–163.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-48 Procedure: QCC Operator to Receive Call Types 3 Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Operator menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select Queued Call.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-49 l Group Coverage Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select Operator. = option name selected in Step 4 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 3ULRULW\ 2SHUDWRU ([LW ! PC Enter the group coverage number (nn = 1 to 30).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-50 Additional Information PC Assign or remove the operator from Group Coverage calls. Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH. You may continue to assign or remove QCC operators from Group Coverage calls by repeating Steps 4 and 5.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-51 Additional Information PC Specify the operator position. 2SHUDWRU (QWHU 4&& RSHUDWRU H[WHQVLRQ QXPEHU LQLW 'HOHWH %DFNVSDFH ([LW = option name selected in Step 4 Ã If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-52 individual lines or trunks to ring into the queue. See “QCC Queue Priority Level” on page 54.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-53 Additional Information Select Call Types. 4XHXHG &DOO 2SHUDWRU ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ +ROG 5WUQ ,Q4XH $OHUW +ROG5HOHDVH &DOO 7\SHV 7KUHVKROG 0VJ &HQWHU (OYDWH3ULRU ([WQG&RPSOW ([LW 5HWXUQ 5LQJ ! Select a call type.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-54 Additional Information Erase the current priority level (x). 3ULRULW\ (QWHU TXHXH SULRULW\ [ %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! PC = option name selected in Step 4 (QWHU 7/I Press Drop. Enter a queue priority level (n = 1 to 7). Ã Dial or type [n]. ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-55 Planning Form Form 6a, Optional Operator Features Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries QCC extension numbers Inspect Yes Copy Option No Console Procedure 2SHUDWRU →4XHXHG &DOO →0VJ &HQWHU →Dial ext. no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-56 Additional Information Specify the QCC operator extension. 2SHUDWRU 0HVVDJH &HQWHU (QWHU 4&& RSHUDWRU H[WHQVLRQ QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW Ã If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-58 Additional Information Specify automatic call extension or require the operator to extend calls manually. 4&& ([WHQG &RPSOHWLRQ 6HOHFW RQH $XWRPDWLF &RPSOHWH 0DQXDO &RPSOHWH ([LW ! PC Select $XWRPDWLF &RPSOHWH or 0DQXDO &RPSOHWH. (QWHU Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-59 Console Procedure 2SHUDWRU →4XHXHG &DOO →5HWXUQ 5LQJ→Drop→ Dial no. of rings→(QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure 7 → → → → → + 3 Procedure: Return Ring Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select Queued Call.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-60 Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Enter the number of rings before the directed call returns to the QCC queue (nn = 1 to 15). Ã Dial or type [nn]. ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW two times.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-61 3 Procedure: Position Busy Backup Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Operator menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select Queued Call.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Erase the current QCC operator backup number (xxxx). 4&& 2SHUDWRU %DFNXS (QWHU 4&& RSHUDWRU RI &DOOLQJ *URXS YYYY 'HOHWH %DFNVSDFH ([LW (QWHU ! Page 3-62 I 7/ Press Drop. Specify the calling group to provide QCC operator backup.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-64 Additional Information PC Go to the second screen of the Queued Call Operator menu. 4XHXHG &DOO 2SHUDWRU ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ +ROG 5WUQ ,Q4XH $OHUW +ROG5HOHDVH &DOO 7\SHV 7KUHVKROG 0VJ &HQWHU (OYDWH3ULRU ([WQG&RPSOW ([LW 5HWXUQ 5LQJ ! Issue 1 February 1998 Press More. Select Voice Announce.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-67 Summary: Assign Trunks or Pools to Extensions 3 Programmable by System Manager Mode All, but note differences in factory settings.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-68 Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: ([WHQVLRQV →/LQHV 7UXQNV→Dial ext. no.→(QWHU→ EQWU\ 0RGH→Dial line/trunk no.→(QWHU→([LW→([LW To program a block of lines/trunks: ([WHQVLRQV →/LQHV 7UXQNV→Dial ext. no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify the extension. $VVLJQ /LQHV 7UXQNV (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! Page 3-69 (QWHU If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” Ã If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required. Go to Step 5. On = extension is assigned to trunk or pool.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-70 Additional Information PC Assign or remove the specified line/trunk number. Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH. You may continue to assign or remove lines/ trunks by repeating Steps 2 and 3. ! Assign a single line/trunk to the next extension or go to Step 5. Select 1H[W Return to Step 2 to continue programming.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-71 Additional Information Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW two times.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-72 Console Procedure To copy to a single extension: ([WHQVLRQV →/LQH &RS\ →6LQJOH→Dial copy from ext. no.→(QWHU→Dial copy to ext. no.→(QWHU→([LW→([LW To copy to a block of extensions: ([WHQVLRQV →/LQH &RS\ →%ORFN→Dial copy from ext. no.→(QWHU→Dial ext. no of first extension in block→ (QWHU→Dial ext.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-73 Additional Information Copy the line assignments to individual extensions or to a block of extensions. &RS\ /LQHV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6LQJOH %ORFN PC ●◆ To copy to a block of extensions, they must be connected to sequentially numbered extension jacks (for example, logical IDs 11, 12, 13 and so on).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-74 Additional Information Save your entry. Continue to copy line assignments or go to Step 5. Select (QWHU or 1H[W PC After selecting (QWHU, you may continue to copy line assignments from the extension currently displayed on Line 1 to additional extensions.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information %DFNVSDFH ([LW (QWHU xxxx = extension entered in Step 4 of the main procedure Dial or type [nnn]. Save your entry. Enter the logical ID of the last extension number in the block to be copied to.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-76 In Hybrid/PBX mode only, use this procedure to assign or change assignments for System Access (SA) buttons used to make or receive inside and outside calls.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-77 Release 3.0 and later Each System Access Ring or Voice on an individual telephone can be assigned as a Shared System Access (SSA) button on up to 27 other telephones. System Access and Intercom buttons are centrally programmed and cannot be programmed by individual telephone users.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-78 Two System Access Ring buttons and a System Access Originate Only Ring button are assigned to tip/ring equipment (for example, single-line telephones or fax machines connected to an 012 module). No personal line or pool buttons are assigned. All Modes.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-79 Procedure: Assign Intercom or System Access Buttons Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Press More. Select Centralized Telephone Programming. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ /DEHOLQJ /DQJXDJH 'DWD 3ULQW &QWU 3UJ ([LW ! PC Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-80 Table 3–2 provides the programming codes for assigning Ring and Voice buttons. You can handle errors in data entry as follows: ■ If you enter a feature code incorrectly while programming, the display shows the 3URJUDPPLQJ (UURU message and the red LED next to the button flashes. If this happens, press the button again and repeat the procedure.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-81 Additional Information PC Specify an extension. &HQWUDOL]HG 3URJUDPPLQJ (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Select Start.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-82 Additional Information Enter the programming code for voice or ring button. =contents of button selected in 3UHVV +20( WR ([LW 'HOHWH 3DJH 3DJH 6\V 3URJUDP ! PC Step 5 (Voice, Ring, or blank) See Table 3–2. Ã /LVW)HDWXUH Assign a voice or ring attribute.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-83 Additional Information Save your entry. Enter the extension to copy to. &RS\ ([WHQVLRQ YYYY WR (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! PC Select (QWHU. ! Issue 1 February 1998 1H[W (QWHU xxxx = extension entered in Step 1 SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry. Then, continue to copy button assignments or go to Step 5.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-84 Analog Multiline Telephone without Built-in Speakerphone (BIS) or Hands Free Answer Intercom (HFAI) Capability 3 Use this procedure to identify analog multiline telephones with flat membrane buttons that do not have BIS or HFAI capability.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-85 Procedure: Analog Multiline Telephones without BIS or HFAI Capability 3 Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select BIS/HFAI.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-86 Analog Multiline Telephones with Voice Announce to Busy 3 Use this procedure to dedicate a voice or voice pair to be used to provide the Voice Announce to Busy feature on an analog multiline telephone. The extension number associated with the first (odd-numbered) extension jack in the pair is the telephone’s extension number.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 3-87 Procedure: Analog Multiline Telephones with Voice Announce to Busy Console Display/Instructions ! 3 Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select Voice Signal.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-88 Additional Information PC Specify whether or not the extension is paired for Voice Announce to Busy. Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH. You may continue to assign or remove the Voice Announce to Busy feature to additional extensions by repeating Steps 3 and 4. ! Return to the System Programming menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-90 Additional Information Select Fax. $X[LOLDU\ (TXLSPHQW ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 0XVLF2Q+ROG 906 $$ /GVSNU 3J )D[ 0DLQW$ODUPV ([LW ! Select Extension. )D[ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ([WHQVLRQ 0VJ :DLWLQJ 7KUHVKROG ([LW ! Specify the extension to be used for the fax machine.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-91 Additional Information Select Message Waiting. )D[ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ([WHQVLRQ 0VJ :DLWLQJ 7KUHVKROG ([LW ! PC Enter the extension for the fax machine that is to send the message-waiting indication.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-92 Additional Information Assign or remove the extension to receive the message-waiting indication. Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH . PC You may continue to assign or remove messagewaiting indication to additional extensions by repeating Steps 10 and 11.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-93 Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-94 3 Extension Language Use this procedure to change the language for an MLX telephone. It applies to Releases 1.1 and later only.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Procedure: Extension Language Console Display/Instructions ! 3 Additional Information Select More. Select Language. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ /DEHOLQJ /DQJXDJH 'DWD 3ULQW &QWU 3UJ ([LW ! Select Extensions.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-96 ● Single Extension Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! ! Additional Information Enter the extension number. ([WHQVLRQ /DQJXDJH (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ QXPEHU If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” %DFNVSDFH ([LW If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required. Go to Step 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-97 ◆ Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Enter the starting extension number. ([WHQVLRQ /DQJXDJH (QWHU VWDUWLQJ H[WHQVLRQ %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Enter the ending extension number.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-98 3 Pool Dial-Out Code Use this procedure to allow or restrict dialing pool dial-out codes and the placing of calls on specific line/trunk pools. Beginning with Release 3.1, the default settings restrict all extensions from dialing any line/trunk pool dial-out code. NOTE: Prior to Release 3.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Procedure: Pool Dial-Out Code Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-99 3 Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select Dial-Out Code.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-100 Additional Information PC Enter the pool dial-out code. ([WHQVLRQ YYYY (QWHU SRRO GLDORXW FRGH %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! Issue 1 February 1998 'HOHWH 1H[W (QWHU xxxx = extension entered in Step 3 Dial or type [nnn]. Allow or restrict the extension from using the pool dial-out code. Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH .
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-101 3 Calling Restrictions Use this procedure to change individual extension calling restrictions to one of the following: ■ Unrestricted ■ Restricted from making all outgoing calls ■ Restricted from making toll calls ! SECURITY ALERT: Toll fraud can occur if extensions are not properly restricted.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Procedure: Calling Restrictions Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-102 3 Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select Restrictions.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-103 Additional Information PC Select the appropriate restriction. ([WHQVLRQ YYYY 6HOHFW RQH 8QUHVWULFWHG 2XWZDUG 5HVWULFW 7ROO 5HVWULFW ([LW xxxx = number entered in Step 3 1H[W (QWHU 8QUHVWULFWHG = remove all restrictions.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-104 If you are copying restrictions to a block of extensions, they must be sequentially numbered. The extensions you are copying to and from can be both operator and nonoperator positions. NOTE: Dial-out code restrictions are not copied.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Procedure: Copy Calling Restrictions Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-105 3 Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select Restrict Copy.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-106 ● Single Extension Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! %DFNVSDFH ([LW SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry. Specify the extension to which you want to copy calling restrictions.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-107 ◆ Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify the extension from which you want to copy calling restrictions. 5HVWULFWLRQ &RS\ (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ WR FRS\ IURP %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-108 3 ARS Restriction Level For Extensions Use this procedure to assign an ARS restriction level to an extension. Outgoing calls can be made only to routes that have a Facility Restriction Level (FRL) lower than or equal to that of the extension for which the call is being made.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-109 Procedure: Assigning ARS Restriction Level For an Extension 3 Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Extensions menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Console Display/Instructions ! %DFNVSDFH ([LW 1H[W (QWHU Additional Information PC xxxx = extension entered in Step 4 Press Drop. I 7/ Enter the restriction level (n = 0 to 6). ([WHQVLRQ YYYY (QWHU $56 UHVWULFW OHYHO Y %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! Page 3-110 Erase the current Restriction Level (x).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-111 3 Forced Account Code Entry Use this procedure to assign or remove Forced Account Code Entry. When this feature is programmed on individual extensions, the user must enter a 1- to 16-digit account code before making an outside call.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-112 Additional Information Select Forced Account Code Entry. ([WHQVLRQV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ /LQHV7UXQNV 5HVWUFW&RS\ /LQH &RS\ $FFRXQW 'LDO 2XW&G %,6 +)$, 5HVWULFWLRQ &DOO 3LFNXS ([LW 9RLFH6LJQO ! Specify the extension.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-113 3 Microphone Operation Use this procedure to enable or disable microphones on MLX telephones (except QCC operator positions). When the microphone is disabled, users cannot use the speakerphone to conduct conversations.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-114 Additional Information Press More. Specify the extension. 0LFURSKRQH 'LVDEOH (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ 'HOHWH %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! Select Microphone Disable.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-115 3 Authorization Codes The Authorization Code feature allows you to pick up someone else’s telephone, enter your authorization code, and complete a call with the restrictions that apply to your own telephone (home extension).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-116 3 Procedure: Authorization Codes Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Console Display/Instructions ! %DFNVSDFH ([LW 1H[W (QWHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW xxxx = extension entered in Step 4 Press Drop. 7/ 1H[W (QWHU Dial or type the authorization code: Use backspace to delete the last digit entered. Save your entry.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-118 3 Remote Call Forwarding Use this procedure to allow or disallow the Remote Call Forwarding capability, which permits users to forward calls to an outside number. In Release 6.0 and later systems, Remote Call Forwarding must be enabled in order for an extension user to activate Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-119 Console Procedure ([WHQVLRQV →More→5HPRWH )UZG→Toggle LED On/Off or Dial ext. no.→(QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → → → → →Toggle letter 5 On/Off or type ext. no.→ 3 Procedure: Remote Call Forwarding Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Extensions menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify the extension. 5HPRWH &DOO )RUZDUG (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ 'HOHWH %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! Page 3-120 (QWHU If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” Ã If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required. Go to Step 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-122 3 Procedure: Delayed Call Forwarding Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-123 Additional Information Erase the current number of delay rings (x). ([WHQVLRQ YYYY (QWHU 'HOD\ 5LQJV xxxx = extension entered in Step 4 Y %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! 1H[W (QWHU Press Drop or Backspace. 7/ Enter the number of delay rings.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-125 Additional Information Press More twice. Specify the extension. 7UXQN WR 7UXQN 7UDQVIHU (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ 'HOHWH %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! Select Trunk to Trunk Transfer.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-126 3 Primary Cover Ring Delay The Primary Cover Ring Delay option replaces the Delay Ring Interval programmed on a systemwide basis in releases prior to Release 4.1.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-127 Procedure: Primary Cover Ring Delay Console Display/Instructions ! 3 Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Press More twice. Select Cover Delay.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Console Display/Instructions ! ! Page 3-128 Additional Information PC Specify the sender’s extension. 3UPDU\ 5LQJ 'HOD\ (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” %DFNVSDFH ([LW If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required. Go to Step 6. On = trunk-to-trunk transfer is enabled.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-129 3 Secondary Cover Ring Delay The Secondary Cover Ring Delay option replaces the Delay Ring Interval programmed on a systemwide basis in releases prior to Release 4.1.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-130 Procedure: Secondary Cover Ring Delay Console Display/Instructions ! 3 Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Press More twice. Select Cover Delay.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Console Display/Instructions ! ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-131 Additional Information Specify the sender’s extension. 6HFRQGDU\ 5LQJ 'HOD\ (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” %DFNVSDFH ([LW If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required. Go to Step 6. On = trunk-to-trunk transfer is enabled.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-132 3 Group Coverage Ring Delay The Group Cover Ring Delay option replaces the Delay Ring Interval programmed on a systemwide basis in releases prior to Release 4.1.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-133 Procedure: Group Coverage Ring Delay Console Display/Instructions ! 3 Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Press More twice. Select Cover Delay.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Console/Display Instructions ! ! Page 3-134 Additional Information PC Specify the sender’s extension. *URXS &RYHU 5LQJ 'HOD\ (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” %DFNVSDFH ([LW If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required. Go to Step 6. On = trunk-to-trunk transfer is enabled.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-135 3 HotLine Use this procedure to enable or disable the HotLine feature on a single-line telephone set or device.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-136 Additional Information Specify the extension. +RW/LQH ([WHQVLRQV (QWHU H[WHQVLRQV 'HOHWH %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! PC Select HotLine.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-137 3 Display Preference In Release 6.0 and later systems, use this procedure to specify display preferences for incoming inside calls or non-local dial plan calls that arrive on PRI tandem trunks.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-138 Additional Information Press More twice. Select Display Preference. ([WHQVLRQV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 7UN7UDQVIHU &RYHU 'HOD\ +RW/LQH 'LVSOD\3UHI ([LW ! PC Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-139 Additional Information Save your entry. Select (QWHU or 1H[W PC If you select 1H[W to assign a display preference to the next extension in a sequence, repeat Step 5. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-140 3 Optional Group Features 3 The procedures in this section describe how to program the following optional features: ■ Pickup Groups ■ Group Paging ■ Group Coverage Member Assignments ■ Group Coverage Delay Interval (Release 4.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Procedure: Pickup Groups Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-141 3 Additional Information PC Select the Extensions menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select Call Pickup.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-142 Additional Information PC Specify the extension. &DOO 3LFNXS *URXS YY xx = number entered in Step 3 (QWHU H[WHQVLRQV If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” Ã 'HOHWH ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required. Go to Step 7.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-143 3 Summary: Group Paging Programmable by System Manager Mode All Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7b, Group Paging Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries Extension number Inspect Yes Copy Option No Console Procedure ([WHQVLRQV →More→Group Page→Dial paging group no.→(QWHU→Dial ext. no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-144 Additional Information PC Select Group Page. ([WHQVLRQV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! ([W 6WDWXV $56 5HVWUFW *URXS 3DJH *URXS &RYHU 0LF 'LVDEOH 5HPRWH )UZG *US &DOOLQJ $XWK &RGH ([LW 'HOD\ )UZG Enter the extension number of the paging group.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-145 Additional Information Continue to assign the extension to another paging group or go to Step 9. Select 1H[W PC Return to Step 6 to continue programming. The next paging group is displayed on Line 1. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-146 Summary: Group Coverage Member Assignments 3 Programmable by System Manager Mode All Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7c, Group Coverage Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries Extension numbers Inspect Yes Copy Option No Console Procedure ([WHQVLRQV →More→*URXS &RYHU →Dial group no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-147 Additional Information PC Select Group Coverage. ([WHQVLRQV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! ([W 6WDWXV $56 5HVWUFW *URXS 3DJH 0LF 'LVDEOH *URXS &RYHU *US &DOOLQJ 5HPRWH )UZG $XWK &RGH ([LW 'HOD\ )UZG Enter the number of the coverage group (nn = 1 to 30).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-148 Additional Information PC Continue to assign the extension to another coverage group or go to Step 9. Select 1H[W Return to Step 6 to continue programming. The next coverage group is displayed on Line 1. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-149 Procedure: Group Coverage Delay Interval Console/Display Instructions ! 3 Additional Information PC Select the Options menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Go to the second screen of the Options menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-150 Additional Information Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW. Group Calling Member Assignments PC 3 Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension to or from a calling group.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Inspect Yes Copy Option No Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-151 Console Procedure ([WHQVLRQV →More→*US &DOOLQJ →0HPEHUV→ Dial calling group ext. no.→(QWHU→Dial ext. no.→(QWHU→ ([LW→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → → → →Type calling group ext. no.→ →Type ext. no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-152 Additional Information PC Select Members. *URXS &DOOLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! +XQW 7\SH 4XHXH $ODUP 'HOD\$QQFH ;WQO $OHUW *US&RYHUDJH 2YHUIORZ 0HVVDJH 0HPEHUV ([LW /LQH 3RRO Enter the extension number of the calling group.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-153 Additional Information PC Continue to assign the extension to another calling group or go to Step 10. Select 1H[W Return to Step 7 to continue programming. The next calling group is displayed on Line 1. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW three times.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-154 Procedure: Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool Assignments Console Display/Instructions ! 3 Additional Information PC Select the Extensions menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-155 Additional Information PC Enter the extension of the calling group. *URXS &DOOLQJ (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ QXPEHU RI JURXS %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Ã Dial or type [nnnn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Enter the line/trunk or pool number.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-157 Valid Entries Circular, Linear, Most Idle Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure ([WHQVLRQV →More→*US &DOOLQJ →+XQW 7\SH→ Dial calling group ext. no.→(QWHU→&LUFXODU, /LQHDU, or 0RVW ,GOH→(QWHU→([LW→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → → → → or or →Type calling group ext. no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-158 Additional Information PC Select Hunt Type. *URXS &DOOLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ +XQW 7\SH 'HOD\$QQFH ! 4XHXH $ODUP ;WQO $OHUW *US&RYHUDJH 2YHUIORZ 0HVVDJH 0HPEHUV ([LW /LQH 3RRO Enter the extension number of the calling group.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-159 3 Group Calling Delay Announcements Use this procedure to designate the announcement devices used to play messages to callers while they are waiting in the queue. As of Release 5.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-160 Procedure: Group Calling Delay Announcements 3 Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Extensions menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-161 Additional Information PC Enter the extension number of the calling group. *US&DOO 'HOD\ $QQRXQFH (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ QXPEHU RI *URXS OOOO %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU SP: “Enter an extension.” Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Ã Select Primary Announcements or Secondary Announcement.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-162 Additional Information PC Continue to assign the delay announcement device extension to another calling group or go to Step 11. Select 1H[W Return to Step 7 to continue programming. The next calling group is displayed on Line 1. ! Return to the System Programming menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-163 Procedure: Group Calling Announcement Interval Console Display/Instructions ! 3 Additional Information PC Select the Extensions menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-164 Additional Information PC Enter the extension number of the calling group. *US&DOO 'HOD\ $QQRXQFH (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ QXPEHU RI *URXS OOOO %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU SP: ‘Enter an extension.” Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Ã Select Announcement Interval.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-165 3 Group Calling Repeat Announcement Use this procedure to set the secondary announcement to repeat after the Announcement Interval.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-166 Additional Information PC Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. ([WHQVLRQV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! /LQHV7UXQNV 5HVWUFW&RS\ /LQH &RS\ $FFRXQW 'LDO 2XW&G %,6 +)$, 5HVWULFWLRQ &DOO 3LFNXS ([LW 9RLFH6LJQO Press More. Select Group Calling.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-167 Additional Information PC Select Repeat announcement. *URXS &DOOLQJ YYYY 6HOHFW RQH 3ULPDU\ $QQRXQFHPHQWV 6HFRQGDU\ $QQRXQFHPHQW $QQRXQFHPHQW ,QWHUYDO 5HSHDW $QQRXQFHPHQW ([LW ! Enter the Yes or No. *URXS &DOOLQJ YYYY xxxx =calling group ext. no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-169 Additional Information PC Select Group Calling. ([WHQVLRQV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! ([W 6WDWXV $56 5HVWUFW *URXS 3DJH 0LF 'LVDEOH *URXS &RYHU 5HPRWH )UZG *US &DOOLQJ ([LW $XWK &RGH 'HOD\ )UZG Select Group Coverage.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-170 Additional Information PC Assign or remove the coverage group as the receiver for the calling group. Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH. You may continue to assign or remove additional coverage groups as the receiver for the calling group by repeating Steps 7 and 8.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-171 Overflow coverage can be provided only by calling groups or the QCC queue (Hybrid/PBX only), not by individual extensions.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-172 Procedure: Group Calling Overflow and Thresholds Console Display/Instructions ! 3 Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Press More. Select Group Calling.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-173 Additional Information PC Enter the extension of the calling group. *URXS &DOOLQJ (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ QXPEHU RI JURXS %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Ã Dial or type [nnnn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-174 Additional Information Assign or remove the group or directory as overflow backup coverage. Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH. PC You may continue to assign or remove additional groups or directories as overflow backup coverage by repeating Steps 7 and 8.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-175 Additional Information xxxx = number entered in Step 5 ([LW Erase the current timeout (xxx). *URXS &DOOLQJ YYYY (QWHU PD[ WLPHRXW VHF EHIRUH RYHUIORZ YYY %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU xxxx = number entered in Step 5 Press Drop.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-176 Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU to return to Step 10 or 1H[W to return to Step 8. You may change the overflow receiver by repeating Steps 7 and 8. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW three times.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-177 Procedure: Group Calling Message-Waiting Indicator Console Display/Instructions ! 3 Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Press More. Select Group Calling.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-178 Additional Information PC Enter the extension of the calling group. *URXS &DOOLQJ (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ QXPEHU RI JURXS %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [nnnn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Ã Erase the current extension (nnnn).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-179 Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm Thresholds 3 Use this procedure to specify the number of calls that wait in the calling group queue before group members are notified with either an external alert (an external alert is turned on when the third threshold is met) or a light on the telephone.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-180 Procedure: Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm Thresholds 3 Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Press More. Select Group Calling.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-181 Additional Information PC Enter the extension of the calling group. *URXS &DOOLQJ (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ QXPEHU RI JURXS %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [nnnn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Select the Threshold number.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-182 Additional Information PC Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-183 Procedure: Group Calling External Alert for Calls-In-Queue Alarm Console Display/Instructions ! 3 Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Press More.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-184 Additional Information PC Enter the extension of the calling group. *URXS &DOOLQJ (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ QXPEHU RI JURXS %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Ã Dial or type [nn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Erase the current external alert extension (nnnn) if assigned.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-185 3 Group Type Use this procedure to determine whether or not the system automatically logs in members of a calling group after a power failure. This setting also determines the type of voice messaging interface when the calling group is used to connect voice messaging or automated attendant applications.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-187 Additional Information Go to the second screen of the Group Calling menu. *URXS &DOOLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ +XQW 7\SH 4XHXH $ODUP 'HOD\$QQFH ;WQO $OHUW *US&RYHUDJH 2YHUIORZ 0HVVDJH 0HPEHUV ([LW /LQH 3RRO ! PC Select Group Calling.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify the type of login for the group that occurs after a power failure. *URXS &DOOLQJ YYYY 6HOHFW 2QH $XWR /RJLQ $XWR /RJRXW ,QWHJ 90, *HQHULF 90, 1H[W ([LW (QWHU ! Page 3-188 xxxx = number entered in Step 6 Press the button or function key next to your selection.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-189 Remote-access calls to a calling group, coverage calls directed to a calling group, and all outside/CO calls are not eligible for queue control.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-190 3 Procedure: Queue Control Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-191 Additional Information PC Select Queue Control. *URXS &DOOLQJ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ *URXS 7\SH 4XHXH &WUO ([LW ! Enter the extension number of the group. *URXS &DOOLQJ (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ QXPEHU RI JURXS %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Ã Dial or type [nnnn]. Save your entry.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-193 3 Transfer Return Time Use this procedure to specify the number of times the telephone rings before a call transferred to another inside telephone is returned to the originator. A setting of 0 means that transferred calls are never returned to the originator.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-194 Additional Information PC Select Transfer. 2SWLRQV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 7UDQVIHU &DOOEDFN &DPS2Q ([W 6WDWXV &DOO3DUN5WQ 60'5 'HOD\ 5LQJ ,QVLGH'LDO ([LW 5HPLQGHU6UY ! Select Return Time.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-195 3 One-Touch Transfer/One-Touch Hold Use this procedure to assign the One-Touch Transfer or One-Touch Hold feature. One-Touch Transfer allows users to initiate transfers to another extension by pressing an Auto Dial or DSS button for that extension.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-196 Procedure: One-Touch Transfer/Hold Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Options menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select Transfer.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-197 Additional Information Save your entry. PC Select (QWHU. If you selected 7UDQVIHU, continue with Step 6. If you selected +ROG, you have finished this procedure. Go to Step 8. ! Specify manual or automatic transfer completion.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-199 Additional Information PC Select Transfer Audible. 7UDQVIHU 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 5HWXUQ 7LPH 2QH 7RXFK $XGLEOH 7\SH ([LW ! Specify whether the outside caller hears music or ringing while being transferred.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-200 Valid Entries Voice Announce, Ring Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure 2SWLRQV→7UDQVIHU →7\SH→9RLFH $QQRXQFH or 5LQJ→ (QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → Procedure: Type of Transfer Console Display/Instructions ! → or → → 3 Additional Information PC Select Transfer.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-201 Additional Information PC Specify whether a voice or ring button is automatically selected. 7\SH RI 7UDQVIHU 6HOHFW RQH 9RLFH $QQRXQFH 5LQJ ([LW ! Select 9RLFH $QQRXQFH or 5LQJ. (QWHU Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-202 3 Procedure: Camp-On Return Time Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Options menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select Camp-On.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-203 3 Call Park Return Time Use this procedure to specify the number of seconds before a call put on hold with the Park feature is returned to the originator.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-204 Additional Information PC Erase the current number of seconds (xxx). &DOO 3DUN 5HWXUQ 7LPH (QWHU WLPH EHIRUH UHWXUQ VHF LQFUHPHQW YYY %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU 7/I Press Drop. Enter the number of seconds before a parked call returns to the originator (nnn = 30 to 300). Dial or type [nnn].
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-205 Console Procedure 2SWLRQV→'HOD\ 5LQJ→Drop→Dial no. of rings→ (QWHU→([LW PC Procedure 7 → → + I→Type no. of rings→ → 3 Procedure: Delay Ring Interval Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Options menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-206 3 Automatic Callback Interval Use this procedure to specify the number of times the telephone rings at the originator’s telephone before the system cancels a Callback request.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-207 Additional Information PC Select Automatic Callback Interval. 2SWLRQV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 7UDQVIHU &DOOEDFN &DPS2Q ([W 6WDWXV &DOO3DUN5WQ 60'5 'HOD\ 5LQJ ,QVLGH'LDO ([LW 5HPLQGHU6UY ! Erase the current number of rings (x).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-208 3 Extension Status Use this procedure to specify whether the Extension Status (ES) feature is used in Hotel mode or Group Calling/Call Management System (CMS) mode. The calling mode affects the meaning of the LEDs and the use of Auto Dial or DSS buttons when the DLC operator position is in Extension Status mode.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-209 Additional Information Select Extension Status. 2SWLRQV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 7UDQVIHU &DOOEDFN &DPS2Q ([W 6WDWXV &DOO3DUN5WQ 60'5 'HOD\ 5LQJ ,QVLGH'LDO ([LW 5HPLQGHU6UY ! Specify the extension status mode.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Inspect No Copy Option No Page 3-210 Console Procedure More→/DQJXDJH→60'5→Select language→(QWHU→([LW PC Procedure → → ! Additional Information Press More. Select Language. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ /DEHOLQJ /DQJXDJH 'DWD 3ULQW &QWU 3UJ ([LW ! PC Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-211 Additional Information Specify the SMDR language. 60'5 /DQJXDJH 6HOHFW RQH (QJOLVK )UHQFK 6SDQLVK ([LW ! Select (QJOLVK, )UHQFK, or 6SDQLVK. (QWHU Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-212 Console Procedure 2SWLRQV→60'5→)RUPDW→%DVLF 60'5 or ,6'1 60'5→ (QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → → → ! Additional Information Select SMDR. Select Call Report Format.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-213 Additional Information Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice. 3 SMDR Call Length Use this procedure to set the minimum time length of a call before it is recorded on SMDR call reports. NOTES: 1.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-214 3 Procedure: SMDR Call Length Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Options menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select SMDR.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-215 Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-216 Procedure: SMDR Calls Recorded on Call Report 3 Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Options menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select SMDR.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-217 3 SMDR Account Code Format For calls made using an authorization code, SMDR can be programmed to have either the “home extension” or the actual authorization codes recorded in the Account Code field if no Account Code is entered. Account Code overrides the Authorization Code entry in the SMDR record when both features are used.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-218 Additional Information Select SMDR. 2SWLRQV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 7UDQVIHU &DOOEDFN &DPS2Q ([W 6WDWXV &DOO3DUN5WQ 60'5 'HOD\ 5LQJ ,QVLGH'LDO ([LW 5HPLQGHU6UY ! Select Authorization Code.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-219 3 SMDR Talk Time In Release 4.2 and later systems, the Talk field was added to the SMDR call record. The talk field is designed for the MERLIN LEGEND Reporter application that is used to capture detailed information on incoming and outgoing voice and data calls with a special emphasis on calling groups.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-220 Additional Information Select Talk Time. 6WDWLRQ 0HVVDJH 5HFRUG 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ )RUPDW $XWK &RGH &DOO /HQJWK 7DON 7LPH &DOO 5HSRUW 1HZ 3DJH ([LW ! Specify whether you want Talk Time enabled or disabled. 60'5 7DON 7LPH 5HSRUW 6HOHFW RQH (QDEOH 'LVDEOH ([LW ! PC Select SMDR.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-221 3 Inside Dial Tone Use this procedure to set the inside (system) dial tone to be either different from, or the same as, the outside line/trunk dial tone. NOTE: The inside dial tone must be the same as the outside dial tone when the internal dial tone is not recognized by software applications or modems.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-222 Additional Information Select Inside Dial Tone. 2SWLRQV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 7UDQVIHU &DOOEDFN &DPS2Q ([W 6WDWXV &DOO3DUN5WQ 60'5 'HOD\ 5LQJ ,QVLGH'LDO ([LW 5HPLQGHU6UY ! Specify which dial tone you want for inside.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-224 Additional Information PC Erase the current reminder service time (xxxx) if assigned. 5HPLQGHU 6HUYLFH &DQFHO (QWHU KRXU DQG PLQXWH YYYY %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Press Drop. 7/I Enter the time of day when all reminders are to be canceled (hh = 00 to 23 and mm = 00 to 59).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information Press More. Specify where to redirect calls made to unassigned extension numbers. &DOO 8QDVVLJQHG ([W 6HOHFW RQH 4&& 4XHXH ([WHQVLRQ *US &DOOLQJ ([LW ! Select Redirect Unassigned Extension Numbers.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-227 Additional Information Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW. PC ● Extension Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify the extension to which calls are to be redirected.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-228 Host System Dial Codes for Behind Switch Mode 3 Use this procedure to assign the host system dial codes for the Transfer, Conference, and Drop features. When multiline telephone users press the Transfer, Conference, or Drop button, a signal is sent to the host service and the communications system features are not accessed.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-229 Additional Information Press More. Select 7UDQVIHU , &RQIHUHQFH, or 'URS. ([LW Erase the current host system dial code (xxxxxx). 3URJUDP (QWHU KRVW V\VWHP GLDO FRGH YYYYYY %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! Specify the feature to which you want to assign a dial code.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-230 Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice. 3 Recall Timer Use this procedure to designate the length of the timed flash that is sent when Recall is used to disconnect a call and get a new dial tone without hanging up.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-231 3 Procedure: Recall Timer Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Options menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Go to the second screen of the Options menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-232 3 Interdigit Timers This procedure to program interdigit timers has not yet been implemented. If situations occur where a caller is attempting to make an outside call and becomes connected to an incoming call, the caller may not be able to put the incoming call on hold or transfer the call.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Procedure: Allowed Lists Console Display/Instructions ! Page 3-233 3 Additional Information Select the Tables menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select Allowed List.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-234 Additional Information PC Erase the current area code/exchange (nnnnnn). $OORZHG /LVW M (QWU\ F (QWHU OLVW LWHP l = list number entered in Step 3 e = entry number entered in Step 3 OOOOOO %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! 1H[W (QWHU 7/I Press Drop. Enter the allowed area code/exchange (up to 6 digits).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-235 Console Procedure 7DEOHV→$OORZ7R→Dial list no.→(QWHU→Dial ext. no.→ (QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → → Procedure: Assign Allowed Lists to Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! →Type list no.→ → →Type ext. no.→ 3 Additional Information Select the Tables menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-236 Additional Information PC Specify the extension to assign to the allowed list.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-237 3 Disallowed Lists Use this procedure to establish Disallowed Lists. These lists are telephone numbers that cannot be dialed from specified extensions (including unrestricted extensions). A maximum of eight lists (numbered 0 through 7), with 10 entries each (numbered 0 through 9) is allowed.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 3-238 3 Procedure: Disallowed Lists Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Tables menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select Disallowed List.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-239 Additional Information PC Enter the disallowed telephone number (n = up to 12 digits). Ã Dial or type [n]. ! Continue to assign the next telephone number to the disallowed list or go to Step 8. Select 1H[W. Use 1H[W to assign the next entry to the disallowed list displayed on Line 1.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-240 Procedure: Assign Disallowed Lists to Extensions 3 Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Tables menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select Disallow To Lists.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-241 Additional Information PC Specify the extension to which you want to assign the disallowed list.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-243 Console Procedure To assign a calling group to a Night Service group: 1LJKW6UYFH →*URXS$VVLJQ→&DOOLQJ *URXS→Dial ext. no. of Night Service attendant→(QWHU→Dial calling group no.→ (QWHU→([LW→([LW To assign an extension to a Night Service group: 1LJKW6UYFH →*URXS$VVLJQ→([WHQVLRQV→Dial ext. no. of Night Service attendant→(QWHU→Dial no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-244 Additional Information Select Group Assignment. 1LJKW 6HUYLFH 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ *URXS$VVLJQ 6WDUW 2XW5HVWULFW 6WRS (PHUJHQF\ 7LPH &RQWURO ([FOXGH/LVW &RYHU &RQWURO ([LW ! ! PC Select an option.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-245 ● Extensions Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify the extension you want to assign to the Night Service group.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-246 Additional Information PC Assign or remove the calling group(s) from the Night Service group.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-248 Additional Information PC Erase the current password (xxxx) if assigned. 1LJKW 6HUY 2XW5HVWULFW (QWHU GLJLW SDVVZRUG YYYY %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! ! (QWHU Press Drop. 7/I Enter a four-digit password (n = any combination of 0 to 9).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-249 Additional Information Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Erase the current telephone number (n) if assigned. 1LJKW 6HUY (PHUJHQF\ Y (QWHU WHOHSKRQH QXPEHU x = list item number entered in Step 7 O %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! 1H[W (QWHU Press Drop. Enter the telephone number (up to 12 digits).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify the extension. 1LJKW 6HUY ([FOXVLRQ (QWHU H[WHQVLRQV H[FOXGHG 'HOHWH %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! Page 3-250 (QWHU Ã If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required. Then, go to Step 16.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-251 NOTE: For Release 2.1 and earlier, after setting Start and Stop time for Night Service you must use the following procedure to set the current day of the week for Night Service.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-252 Procedure: Night Service with Time Set Console Display/Instructions ! 3 Additional Information Select the Night Service menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! PC ●◆■ Select Night Service option.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-253 Additional Information Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW. ◆ Add or Change Stop Time Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Erase the current stop day and time (xxxxx) if assigned.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-254 ■ Activate/Deactivate Night Service Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information Turn Night Service On or Off. Select 2Q to turn Night Service on. 1LJKW 6HUY 7LPH &RQWURO 6HOHFW RQH 2Q 2II ([LW ! Select 2II to turn Night Service off. (QWHU Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Page 3-255 Factory Setting Disabled Valid Entries Enable or Disable Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure 1LJKW6UYFH →&RYHU&RQWUO →(QDEOH or 'LVDEOH → (QWHU→([LW PC Procedure → → or → → Procedure: Night Service with Coverage Control 3 Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Night Service menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-256 3 Labeling The procedures in this section cover how to add or change labels for the following: ■ Extension Directory ■ Lines or Trunks ■ Posted Message ■ Group Calling ■ System Speed Dial Directory These procedures can be done using Integrated Administration.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-257 3 Summary: Extension Directory Programmable by System Manager Mode All Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries Not applicable Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure More→/DEHOLQJ→'LUHFWRU\→([WHQVLRQ→ Dial ext. no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-258 Additional Information Select Extension. 'LUHFWRU\ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQ 3HUVRQDO ([LW ! PC Select Directory. /DEHOLQJ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 'LUHFWRU\ /LQHV7UXQNV 3RVW0HVVDJH *US &DOOLQJ ([LW ! Issue 1 February 1998 Specify the extension you want to label.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-259 Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Enter a label for the extension. Use 3XQFWXDWLRQ to toggle between letters and punctuation. Ã Dial or type the label. ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU. NOTE: , not . Continue to label additional extensions by repeating Steps 5 through 9.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-260 3 Procedure: Lines or Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! Press More. Select Lines/Trunks. /DEHOLQJ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 'LUHFWRU\ /LQHV7UXQNV 3RVW0HVVDJH *US &DOOLQJ ([LW ! Enter the line or trunk number. /DEHO /LQHV 7UXQNV (QWHU WKH OLQH WUXQN QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! Select the Labeling menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-261 Additional Information Erase the current label (AAAAAAA) if assigned. / [[[ (QWHU QHZ ODEHO $$$$$$$ 3XQFWXDWLRQ (QWHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW $ % & ' ( 6SDFH ) ! PC xxx = number entered in Step 4 7/I Press Drop. Enter a label for the line or trunk.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-262 3 Summary: Posted Messages Programmable by System Manager, Integrated Administration Mode All Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 8a, Label Form: Posted Message Factory Setting First 10 messages Valid Entries 1 to 20 Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure More→/DEHOLQJ→3RVW0HVVDJH→Dial message no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-263 Additional Information PC Select Posted Message. /DEHOLQJ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 'LUHFWRU\ /LQHV7UXQNV 3RVW0HVVDJH *US &DOOLQJ ([LW ! Issue 1 February 1998 Enter the posted message number (nn = 1 to 20). 3RVWHG 0HVVDJH (QWHU WKH PHVVDJH QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [nn]. Save your entry.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-264 Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. NOTE: , not . Change additional messages by repeating Steps 4 through 8. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-265 3 Procedure: Group Calling Console Display/Instructions ! Press More. Select Group Calling. /DEHOLQJ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 'LUHFWRU\ /LQHV7UXQNV 3RVW0HVVDJH *US &DOOLQJ ([LW ! Select the Labeling menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-266 Additional Information PC Erase the current label (AAAAAAA) if assigned. *US&O YYYY (QWHU QHZ ODEHO $$$$$$$ 3XQFWXDWLRQ (QWHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW $ % & ' ( 6SDFH ) ! Issue 1 February 1998 xxxx = number entered in Step 4 Press Drop. 7/I Enter a label for the calling group.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 3-267 3 System Speed Dial Directory Use this procedure to establish System Speed Dial numbers for all system users. You can also use this procedure to enter the alphanumeric labels shown on display telephones (for the System Directory feature of the MLX telephone).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-268 Additional Information Select Directory. /DEHOLQJ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 'LUHFWRU\ /LQHV7UXQNV 3RVW0HVVDJH *US &DOOLQJ ([LW ! Select System. 'LUHFWRU\ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQ 3HUVRQDO ([LW ! PC Select the Labeling menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-269 Additional Information PC Erase the current label (AAAAAAA) if assigned. (QWU\ YYY (QWHU QHZ QDPH $$$$$$$ 3XQFWXDWLRQ (QWHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW $ % & ' ( 6SDFH ) ! Issue 1 February 1998 xxx = code entered in Step 4 Press Drop. 7/I Enter a label for the speed dial code.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-270 Additional Information PC Enter a telephone number for the speed dial code entered in Step 5 (n = up to 20 digits). Include any special characters shown on the planning form: ■ Hold (A+H) = Pause ■ Drop (A+P) = Stop ■ Conference (A+F) = switchhook flash à Dial or type [n]. ! Save your entry.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Page 3-271 3 Print Reports Use the procedures in this section to change the language for system reports and to print the system reports. 3 Report Language Use this procedure to change the language of the system reports. It applies to Release 1.1 and higher.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-272 Additional Information Select Printer. /DQJXDJH 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP/DQJ ([WHQVLRQV 60'5 3ULQWHU ([LW ! Specify a language for the reports. 3ULQWHU /DQJXDJH 6HOHFW RQH (QJOLVK )UHQFK 6SDQLVK ([LW ! (QWHU Select (QJOLVK, )UHQFK, or 6SDQLVK. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Select Language.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Printing System Reports Page 3-273 3 The communications system can be used to print a variety of reports. You can print individual reports or use the $OO option to print the entire set of available reports, including all report sections and options. See Appendix F for samples of the print reports. Use this procedure to print the reports listed below.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Page 3-275 NOTE: If you select the $OO option, keep in mind that the reports take several minutes to print. You may want to schedule use of the printer during off-peak hours. If you select a report for which there is no information, the report header still prints. Print reports if you cannot back up your system programming information.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports PC Procedure Page 3-276 < To print trunk information: → → →Select trunk type→ To print extension information: → → → →Type extension no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-278 ● Trunk Information Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! PC Specify a trunk type. 7UXQN ,QIR (QWHU OLQH WUXQN W\SH 7,( 6 'DWD ',' /RRS *URXQG *HQHUDO ([LW ! Additional Information Press the button or function key next to your selection. Ã Return to Step 4 of the main procedure.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Memory Card Page 3-279 3 A PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) interface slot is present on the processor module. The slot is a standard interface through which information can be added to or obtained from the system using a memory card. The PCMCIA interface slot accepts one memory card at a time.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Figure 3–4.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-281 3 Inserting the Card To insert the card, hold the card with the Lucent logo facing up and the arrow pointing toward the slot. See Figure 3-5 for the proper way to insert the memory card into the slot on the processor module.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-282 3 Backup Use this procedure to make a copy of your customized system data. You should create a backup at least three times during system installation (so that programmed information is not lost) and once after each system upgrade, service technician visit, or major system reconfiguration.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-283 NOTE: If the system performs a System Erase (frigid start), all programming is set to the default values. If a previous backup file is available, perform a restore. If not, the system must be reprogrammed. See “Restore” on page –447 for information about the system restore procedure.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 3-284 Additional Information Select the System menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select Back/Restore.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information x = backup file selected in Step 5 mm/dd = current month and day Use 3XQFWXDWLRQ to toggle between the letters and punctuation. Enter or type [filename]. Use the buttons next to the display to specify the letters A through I and punctuation.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Console/Display Instructions ! Page 3-286 Additional Information PC Observe the backup completion screen. %DFNXS OOOOOOOOOOO %DFNXS 6XFFHVVIXOO\ &RPSOHWHG nnnnnnnnnnn = backup filename ([LW ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW three times.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-287 NOTE: If an automatic backup fails for any reason (except when the failure results because the memory card is write-protected) the automatic backup feature is turned off. Follow the procedure below to reprogram automatic backups.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-288 3 Procedure: Automatic Backup Console Display/Instructions Additional Information ! Insert the memory card into the PCMCIA interface slot on the processor module. ! Select the System menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Console/Display Instructions ! Save your entry. Page 3-289 Additional Information PC ●◆ Select (QWHU. If you selected 2II you have finished this procedure. Go to Step 7. If you selected 'DLO\ go to ● Daily Backup Procedure. If you selected :HHNO\ go to ◆ Weekly Backup Procedure. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-290 ◆ Weekly Backup Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Erase the current weekly backup day and time (xxxxx).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 3-291 3 Backup Canceled If the system detects an error, either on the memory card or with the backup file, or if you terminate the backup, this screen appears. %DFNXS Y %$&.83 ,6 &$1&(/(' )LOH KDV EHHQ '(/(7(' x = backup filename ([LW The backup file being created is deleted and the backup is terminated. You must repeat the backup procedure.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 3 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Card Is Write-Protected Page 3-292 3 The memory card is write-protected. You must remove the memory card, flip the write-protect tab, reinsert the memory card, and repeat the backup procedure.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Page 4-1 Programming Procedures 4 4 This chapter contains procedures for all of the advanced programming features and options available on the System Programming menu, where each of the procedures begins. It also contains summary information for all of the common programming features described in detail in Chapter 3, “Common Administrative Procedures.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-2 4 The procedures in this section are all related to the system rather than to the operation of telephones, operator positions, lines, or trunks. These are operating conditions that must be set only once, when the system is new, or when you reset the system defaults.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-4 Additional Information Respond to the query. 6\VWHP 5HVWDUW 6\VWHP ZLOO EH GRZQ To restart the system select
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-6 Factory Setting English Valid Entries English, French, Spanish Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure More→/DQJXDJH→6\VWHP/DQJ→
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Procedure: Board Renumbering Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-7 4 Additional Information PC Select the System menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select Board Renumbering.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-9 Console Procedure 6\VWHP→0RGH→Select mode→(QWHU PC Procedure → Procedure: Mode of Operation Console Display/Instructions ! →Select mode→ 4 Additional Information PC Select the System menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-10 4 Automatic Maintenance Busy Automatic Maintenance Busy allows the system to take a malfunctioning trunk out of service for outgoing calls (incoming calls are never blocked). This prevents faulty outside facilities from causing disruptions in outgoing calling patterns.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-11 Procedure: Automatic Maintenance Busy Console Display/Instructions ! 4 Additional Information PC Select the System menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select Automatic Maintenance Busy.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information 6HOHFW RQH (QDEOH 'LVDEOH ([LW (QWHU If you selected (QDEOH and your system has tie trunks, specify whether to take malfunctioning tie trunks out of service automatically or leave malfunctioning tie trunks available for outgoing calls. Select (QDEOH or 'LVDEOH. Save your entry.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 4-13 4 Summary: Set System Date Programmable by.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-15 In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), you may choose non-local dial plan numbering to specify the numbering of extensions connected to remote networked systems and allow users on your system to access those extensions as if they were connected to your own system. You specify only ranges of extensions.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-17 4 Select System Numbering Plan ! WARNING: To avoid possible loss of system programming information, renumber the system before you program the rest of the options described in this chapter. The three available local system numbering plans listed below appear on System Planning Form 2a. ■ Two-Digit.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-19 Additional Information PC Select the appropriate system numbering plan. 'HIDXOW 1XPEHULQJ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 'LJLW 'LJLW 6HW8S 6SDFH ([LW ! Select 'LJLW and go to Step 5. Select 'LJLW and go to Step 5. Select 6HW8S 6SDFH and continue with Step 4. Observe the initialize space screen.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-20 4 Single Renumbering Use this procedure to assign a specified extension number to a telephone, accessory, line, pool (Hybrid/PBX only), calling group, paging group, or Listed Directory Number. Single renumbering is also used for Remote Access, Park, Idle Line Access (Key and Behind Switch only), and Automatic Route Selection (Hybrid/PBX only).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-21 4 Block Renumbering Use this procedure to assign extension numbers to a group of extensions, accessories, or lines. Both the original numbers and the numbers they are being changed to must be sequentially numbered. When required, this procedure should be performed immediately following the selection of a system numbering plan.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 4-22 4 Non-Local Dial Plan Extension Ranges There are two procedures in non-local numbering: ■ Specifying new extension ranges ■ Deleting extension ranges Chapter 3, “Common Administrative Procedures,” includes further details about this type of numbering.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-25 Additional Information PC Go to the second screen of the System Renumber menu. 6\VWHP 5HQXPEHU ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ /LQHV ! *US&DOOLQJ ([WHQVLRQV $GMXQFWV 3RROV 3DUN *URXS 3DJH $56 'LDO2XW ([LW 5HPRWH$FFV Press More. Select DSS Buttons.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-26 Additional Information PC Erase the current dial code (nnnn). '66 3DJH %XWWRQ O n = page button entered in Step 5 (QWHU ILUVW GLDO FRGH RI JURXS PXOWLSOH RI OOOO ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Press Drop. 7 + Enter the first extension of the group of 50 or 100 extension numbers.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions Page 4-27 4 System Operator Positions A system operator position, for a Queued Call Console (QCC) operator or a Direct-Line Console (DLC) operator, should be programmed before you program lines or trunks. 4 QCC Operator Position The QCC operator position is available only for Hybrid/PBX systems.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions Page 4-28 4 DLC Operator Positions DLC operator positions can be assigned to the first and fifth extension jacks on the first modules with digital or analog multiline extension jacks. A maximum of eight DLC operator positions can be assigned. For detailed programming procedures see “DLC Operator Positions” on page 3–29.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Lines and Trunks Page 4-29 4 The procedures in this section are used to assign optional features to individual lines and trunks.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-31 4 Procedure: Type of Trunk Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information 6HOHFW RQH *URXQG6WDUW /RRS 6WDUW $OO *URXQG $OO /RRS ([LW = 400, 408, 408-MLX, or 800 modules xx = slot number entered in Step 3 Select *URXQG6WDUW or /RRS 6WDUW and go to Step 6. Or, select $OO *URXQG or $OO /RRS and go to Step 9.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-33 Outmode Signaling for Loop- or Ground-Start Trunks 4 Use this procedure to identify either touch-tone signaling or rotary-dial signaling for outgoing calls placed by using the specified loop- or ground-start trunk. NOTE: Since the factory setting is touch-tone, this procedure is not required if your system has only touch-tone lines/trunks.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-34 Procedure: Outmode Signaling for Loop- or Ground-Start Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! 4 Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-35 ● Single Line Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify entry mode. Select (QWU\ 0RGH . ! Enter the number of the line/trunk with touch-tone dialing. 2XW7UXQN 'LDO (QWHU 7UXQNV Z 7RXFK7RQH 'HOHWH %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Ã Dial or type [nnn]. Assign or remove touch tone signaling from the line/trunk.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-36 ◆ Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify the block of 20 lines associated with 20 buttons on the system programming console. Select /LQHV /LQHV /LQHV /LQHV ! Specify touch-tone or rotary signaling for each block. Toggle the green LED on or off as required.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-37 Procedure: Rotary Trunk Digit Transfer Console Display/Instructions ! 4 Additional Information PC Select the Options menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Go to the second screen of the Options menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-38 Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW. 4 Ringing Frequency Use this procedure to program the ringing frequency on an 016 module. Contact your service provider for more information about the appropriate setting.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-39 4 Procedure: Ringing Frequency Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Options menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Go to the second screen of the Options menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-40 Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify 20 Hz or 25 Hz. 5LQJLQJ )UHT 6ORW YY xx = slot number entered in Step 4 6HOHFW RQH +] +] ([LW ! Select +] or +]. (QWHU Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-41 4 Procedure: Second Dial Tone Timer Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Options menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Go to the second screen of the Options menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-42 Additional Information Enter the second dial tone timer (nnnn = 0 to 5,000 ms, in increments of 200 ms). Ã Dial or type [nnnn]. ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-44 Additional Information PC Select Loop-Start Disconnect. 7RXFK7RQH /6 'LVFRQQHFW 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 2XWPRGH /6 'LVFRQQHFW ([LW ! Specify the disconnect signal as reliable or unreliable. /6 5HOLDEOH 'LVFRQQHFW 6HOHFW RQH
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-46 Additional Information PC Select Toll Type. /LQHV DQG 7UXQNV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! /6 *6 '6 35, 7,( /LQHV &RS\ 77 /6 'LVF 5HPRWH$FFVV ',' 3RROV ([LW 7ROO 7\SH ●◆ Specify the toll type line(s).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-47 Additional Information PC Assign or remove the toll prefix requirement from the line/trunk. Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH. You may continue to assign or remove the toll prefix requirement from additional lines/trunks by repeating Steps 2 and 3. ! Return to the System Programming menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-48 NOTES: 1. If the disconnect interval is longer than the telephone company setting, the line is not released when a caller on hold hangs up. 2. Do not program a short interval unless the local telephone company’s central office is the crossbar type. 3. Do not program a reliable disconnect for lines/trunks with a short hold disconnect interval.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-49 4 Procedure: Hold Disconnect Interval Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-50 ● Single Line Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information Specify entry mode. Select (QWU\ 0RGH . ! PC Enter the number of the line or trunk with a long disconnect interval. +ROG 'LVFRQQHFW (QWHU OLQHV WUXQNV ZLWK ORQJ LQWHUYDO 'HOHWH %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [nnn]. Assign or remove the line/trunk.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-51 ◆ Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify the block of 20 lines associated with 20 buttons on the system programming console. Select /LQHV /LQHV /LQHV /LQHV ! Specify touch-tone or rotary signaling for each block. Toggle the green LED on or off as required.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-53 Additional Information PC Select Principal User. /LQHV DQG 7UXQNV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ +ROG'LVFQFW ! /6 ,' 'HOD\ 3UQFLSDO8VU &ORFN6\QF 4&& 3ULRU %5, 4&& 2SHU 7 'DWD 1: ([LW 8'3 Enter the line or trunk number to which you are assigning a principal user.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-54 Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Continue to assign a principal user to another line or trunk, or go to Step 9. Select 1H[W. Return to Step 6. The next line/trunk is displayed on Line 1. ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-55 Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: /LQHV7UXQNV→More→4&& 3ULRU→Dial priority level→ (QWHU→Select entry mode→Dial trunk no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-56 Additional Information PC Select QCC Queue Priority. /LQHV DQG 7UXQNV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ +ROG'LVFQFW ! /6 ,' 'HOD\ 3UQFLSDO8VU &ORFN6\QF 4&& 3ULRU %5, 4&& 2SHU 7 'DWD 1: ([LW 8'3 Enter the QCC priority level (n = 1 to 7).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-57 ● Single Line Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information Specify entry mode. Select (QWU\ 0RGH . ! PC Enter the line or trunk with the specified queue priority.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-58 ◆ Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons on the system programming console. Select /LQHV /LQHV /LQHV /LQHV ! Assign the queue priority specified. Toggle the green LED on or off as required.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-59 Summary: QCC Operator to Receive Calls 4 Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks Factory Setting No QCC operator is assigned to receive calls.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-60 Additional Information PC Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. /LQHV DQG 7UXQNV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! /6 *6 '6 35, 7,( /LQHV &RS\ 77 /6 'LVF 5HPRWH$FFVV ',' 3RROV ([LW 7ROO 7\SH Press More. Select QCC Operator.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-61 Additional Information Specify the line(s) associated with the QCC operator. 4&& 2SHUDWRU YYYY PC ●◆ xxxx = extension number entered in Step 4 (QWHU OLQH WUXQN QXPEHU /LQHV /LQHV (QWU\ 0RGH For a single line/trunk, go to ● Single Line Procedure.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-62 Additional Information Return to the System Programming menu. PC Select ([LW twice. ◆ Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons on the system programming console.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-63 Any extension or adjunct that answers an incoming CO line on the first ring causes the Caller ID information associated with the call to be lost. The adjunct must be programmed to either answer the call on the second (or later) ring, or delay the call.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-64 Procedure: Loop-Start Identification Delay Console/Display Instructions ! 4 Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-65 ● Single Line Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify entry mode. Select (QWU\ 0RGH . ! Enter the line/trunk number for LS-ID Delay.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-66 Additional Information Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice. Clock Synchronization PC 4 Use this procedure to specify the primary, secondary, and tertiary clock source. A clock source may be either a 100D module or a port on an 800 NI-BRI module.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-68 Additional Information Press More. Select Primary. &ORFN 6\QFURQL]DWLRQ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 3ULPDU\ 6HFRQGDU\ 7HUWLDU\ ([LW ! Select Clock Synchronization.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-69 Additional Information Save your entry. PC Select (QWHU. If the slot selected in Step 5 contains a 100D module, continue with Step 7. If the slot selected in Step 5 contains an 800 NI-BRI, go to Step 8.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-70 Additional Information PC Enter the slot number of the module to contain the secondary system clock. 6HFRQGDU\ 6\VWHP &ORFN (QWHU VORW QXPEHU [[ 'HOHWH %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [xx]. Save your entry. Ã Select (QWHU.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-71 Additional Information Select Tertiary. &ORFN 6\QFURQL]DWLRQ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 3ULPDU\ 6HFRQGDU\ 7HUWLDU\ ([LW ! PC Enter the slot number of the module to contain the tertiary system clock. 7HUWLDU\ 6\VWHP &ORFN (QWHU VORW QXPEHU YY 'HOHWH %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [xx].
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-72 Additional Information PC Select the port on the 800 NI-BRI module to be the tertiary clock source. 7HUWLDU\ /RRS&ON 6ORW YY (QWHU SRUW QXPEHU Y %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [x]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-73 If you want to reassign a line/trunk to a different pool, you must remove it from the current pool before you assign it to the new pool.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-74 Inspect Yes Copy Option Yes Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: /LQHV7UXQNV→3RROV→Dial pool dial-out code→ Select entry mode→Dial no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-75 Additional Information PC Enter the pool number. 3RROV (QWHU SRRO QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [nnn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! ●◆ Specify the pool line(s).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-76 Additional Information PC Assign or remove the line/trunk from the pool. Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH. You may continue to assign or remove additional lines/trunks from the pool by repeating Steps 2 and 3. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Copy Options for Lines/Trunks Page 4-77 4 Use this procedure to copy options assigned to loop-start or ground-start trunks, Tie trunks, or DID trunks. Note that many of these options apply to Hybrid/PBX systems only. The following information is copied for each line/trunk type: ■ Loop-Start or Ground-Start Trunks (including those emulated on T1 facilities).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 4-79 Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select Copy. /LQHV DQG 7UXQNV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ /6 *6 '6 35, 7,( /LQHV &RS\ 77 /6 'LVF 5HPRWH$FFVV ',' 3RROV ([LW 7ROO 7\SH ! Issue 1 February 1998 Specify trunk(s). ●◆ &RS\ 7UXQNV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6LQJOH %ORFN ([LW To copy a single trunk, select 6LQJOH and go to ● Single Trunk Procedure.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-80 Additional Information PC Enter the trunk number to copy to.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-81 Additional Information PC Enter the first trunk number to copy to. &23< 7UXQN YYY 7R (QWHU VWDUWLQJ WUXQN QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! Issue 1 February 1998 (QWHU xxx = “copy from” trunk entered in Step 1 Dial or type: Trunk number [nnn] Slot and port number [sspp] Logical ID number #[nnn] Save your entry. Ã Select (QWHU.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Page 4-82 4 Release 6.0 and later systems, Hybrid/PBX mode only, provide support for Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) facilities, networked lines/trunks originating at one or more other MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems or DEFINITY Communications Systems.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Page 4-83 Wherever possible, the same switch identifiers should be used for the same switch across a network. For example, LEGEND A is identified by switch identifier 22 in LEGEND B and LEGEND C systems in a network. This helps avoid a situation where calls are directed in a loop through several systems.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-84 Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ! ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Page 4-85 ● Single Trunk Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify a single trunk identifier. Select 6Z1XP 6LQJOH . ! Enter the number of the line/trunk. 8'3 6ZLWFK1XP 6LQJOH (QWHU WUXQN QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Ã Dial or type [nnnn].
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Page 4-86 ◆ Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information Specify identifiers for a block of trunks. Select 6Z1XP %ORFN ! PC Enter the starting trunk number in the range. 8'3 6ZLWFK1XP %ORFN (QWHU VWDUWLQJ WUXQN %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [nnnn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-87 Additional Information PC Assign or remove the switch identifier. Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH or You may continue to assign or remove switch identifiers from additional lines/trunks by repeating Steps 2 through 7. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW three times.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-88 If the type is T1 and the type of channel emulation is tie trunk, you must specify whether the lines/trunks are TIE-PBX, Toll, or Switched 56 Data service. The valid settings are as follows: ■ TIE-PBX. Select when emulated tie trunks are used to connect to another communications system (such as PBX or Centrex).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-89 In Release 6.0 and later systems, T1 S56 service is not supported for tandeming applications. Use PRI instead. If you select T1, channels can emulate ground- or loop-start trunks, tie trunks, or DID trunks in any combination. Note that unused channels must be specified as unequipped. If either T1 or PRI is selected, channels can be used for ASN services.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-90 To select T1: DID: /LQHV7UXQNV→/6 *6 '6 →Dial slot no.→(QWHU→7\SH→ 7 →(QWHU→More→','→(QWHU→ Dial channel no.→(QWHU→([LW→([LW→([LW→([LW To select T1- All Tie: /LQHV7UXQNV→/6 *6 '6 →Dial slot no.→(QWHU→7\SH→ 7 →(QWHU→$OO 7,(→(QWHU→ 7,( 3%;, 7ROO, or 6 →(QWHU→Dial channel no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-91 To select T1- All Tie: → →Type slot no.→ or → → → → → → To select T1- Tie: → →Type slot no.→ → or → →Type channel no.→ → → → , → → → → → → , To select T1: ALL Switched 56 Data: → →Type slot no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-92 Additional Information Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1. /LQHV DQG 7UXQNV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ /6 *6 '6 35, 7,( /LQHV &RS\ 77 /6 'LVF 5HPRWH$FFVV ',' 3RROV ([LW 7ROO 7\SH ! PC Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module (nn = 1 to 17).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select a facility type. '6 6ORW YY 6HOHFW RQH 7 35, ([LW ! Page 4-93 xx = slot number entered in Step 3 (QWHU Select 7 or 35,. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. If you selected 35,, you have finished this procedure. Go to “Frame Format.” ! Select a trunk type.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Console/Display Instructions ! Save your entry. Page 4-94 Additional Information ▲❃●◆ Select (QWHU. PC If you selected $OO *URXQG, $OO /RRS, $OO 8QHTXLSSHG , or $OO ',', you have finished this procedure. If you selected *URXQG 6WDUW, /RRS 6WDUW, ',', or 8QHTXLSSHG trunks, continue with Step 10. If you selected 7,( trunks, go to ▲ Tie Trunk Procedure.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-95 Additional Information PC Continue to assign the channel to another slot or go to Step 13. Select 1H[W. Return to Step 10. The next slot is displayed on Line 1. ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW four times.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-96 Additional Information PC Assign or remove the channel. Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH. You may continue to assign or remove additional channels by repeating Steps 3 and 4. ! Continue to assign the channel to another slot or go to Step 6. Select 1H[W. Return to Step 11. The next slot is displayed on Line 1.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-97 ◆ S56 Data Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Enter the channel number (nn = 1 to 24). 6 'DWD /LQHV 6ORW YY (QWHU FKDQQHO QXP xx = slot number entered in Step x. 'HOHWH %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Ã Dial or type [nn]. Assign or remove the channel. Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-98 ▲ Direction Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! PC Select Direction. 6 'DWD &K YY (QWHU FKDQQHO GLUHFWLRQ 7ZR :D\ 2XWJRLQJ ,QFRPLQJ 1H[W ([LW (QWHU ! Additional Information xx = channel selected in Step x. Select 7ZR :D\, 2XWJRLQJ, or ,QFRPLQJ Continue to assign direction to the next channel or go to Step 3. Select 1H[W.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-99 ✚ Trunk Seizure Type Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select Trunk Seizure Type. 6 'DWD 6HOHFW W\SH :LQN 'HOD\ $XWR ([LW &K YY 1H[W (QWHU xx = channel selected in Step x.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-100 Answer Supervision Timing Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Erase the current answer supervision time (nnnn). 6 'DWD &K YY (QWHU $QV6XSHUYLVLRQ7LPH LQFUHPHQW xx = number entered in Step 1 OOOO %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! 1H[W (QWHU Press Drop.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-101 ✱ Disconnect Timing Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! PC Erase the current disconnect time (nnnn). 6 'DWD &K YY (QWHU 'LVFRQQHFW WLPH QQQQ %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! Additional Information 1H[W (QWHU xx = number entered in Step 1 7I Press Drop. + Enter the new disconnect time (nnnn = 140 to 4,800 ms, in increments of 20 ms).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-102 Dial Mode Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! PC Choose an option. 6 'DWD 6HOHFW PRGH 5RWDU\ 7RXFK 7RQH ([LW ! Additional Information &K YY xx = channel selected in Step x = In or Out 1H[W (QWHU Select 5RWDU\ or 7RXFK 7RQH Continue to assign Dial Mode type to the next channel or go to Step 3. Select 1H[W.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-103 ▲ Direction Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Select 7ZR :D\, 2XWJRLQJ, or ,QFRPLQJ Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Select Direction. 6 'DWD (QWHU FKDQQHO GLUHFWLRQ 7ZR :D\ 2XWJRLQJ ,QFRPLQJ 1H[W ([LW (QWHU ! Additional Information Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW four times.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-104 Answer Supervision Timing Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Erase the current answer supervision time (nnnn). 6 'DWD (QWHU $QV6XSHUYLVLRQ7LPH LQFUHPHQW OOOO %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! 1H[W (QWHU Press Drop. Ã Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-105 Additional Information Save your entry. PC Select (QWHU. ! Issue 1 February 1998 Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW four times. Dial Mode Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! ([LW = In or Out 1H[W (QWHU Select 5RWDU\ or 7RXFK 7RQH Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Choose an option.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-106 4 Switched 56 Dial Plan Routing Dial plan routing provides a way to route incoming calls received on a Switched 56 Network line. An incoming call is routed by matching the incoming number and then optionally deleting and/or adding digits to direct the call to a specific endpoint.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-107 4 Switched 56 Data Dial Plan Routing Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-108 Additional Information PC ▲✚ Select an option. 6 'DWD 'LDO 3ODQ 5WQJ ([SHFWHG 'LJLWV $GG 'LJLWV 'HOHWH 'LJLWV ([LW If you select ([SHFWHG 'LJLWV , go to ▲ Expected Digits Procedure. If you select $GG 'LJLWV, go to ✚ Add Digits procedure.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-109 ✚ Add Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Erase the current number of digits to add (nnnn = 0 to 9999). 6 'DWD $GG 'LJLWV (QWHU GLJLWV WR DGG OOOO %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Press Drop. Enter the new number of digits to add (n = 0 to 3). Dial or type [n]. ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-110 4 Frame Format Use this procedure to specify the framing format for the 100D module as D4-compatible or Extended Superframe. Your selection must match the framing mode at the far end of the DS1 facility. NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems, use the Extended Superframe format for tandem PRI trunks.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-111 Additional Information Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1. /LQHV DQG 7UXQNV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ /6 *6 '6 35, 7,( /LQHV &RS\ 77 /6 'LVF 5HPRWH$FFVV ',' 3RROV ([LW 7ROO 7\SH ! PC Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module (nn = 1 to 17).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-112 Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice. If you are using PRI Facilities, go to “Zero Code Suppression.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-113 4 Procedure: Zero Code Suppression Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-114 Console/Display Instructions ! xx = slot number entered in Step 3 Select AMI zero code suppression or bipolar 8 zero substitution. '6 6ORW YY 6HOHFW RQH $0, =&6 % =6 ([LW ! xx = slot number entered in Step 3 Select $0, =&6 or % =6. (QWHU Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Select Suppression.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-115 Factory Setting Robbed bit Valid Entries Robbed Bit, Common Channel Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure /LQHV7UXQNV→/6 *6 '6 →Dial slot no.→(QWHU→ 6LJQDOLQJ→Select type of signaling→(QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → →Type slot no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-116 Additional Information Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Select Signaling. '6 6ORW YY 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 7\SH /LQH &RPS )UDPH)RUPDW &KDQQHO8QLW 6XSSUHVVLRQ 6LJQDOLQJ ([LW ! xx = slot number entered in Step 3 Select the type of signaling.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-117 4 Summary: Line Compensation Programmable by System Manager Mode All Idle Condition 100D module idle Planning Form Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting 1 (0.6 dB loss) Valid Entries 1 to 5 Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure /LQHV7UXQNV→/6 *6 '6 →Dial slot no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-118 Additional Information PC Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module (nn = 1 to 17). /RRS *URXQG '6 (QWHU VORW QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [nn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Select Line Compensation.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 4-119 4 Channel Service Unit Use this procedure to specify the type of equipment provided by the local telephone company as foreign exchange or special access. NOTE: You do not need to use this procedure unless your system emulates loopstart or ground-start with the T1 type of DS1 facility.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-120 Additional Information Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1. /LQHV DQG 7UXQNV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ /6 *6 '6 35, 7,( /LQHV &RS\ 77 /6 'LVF 5HPRWH$FFVV ',' 3RROV ([LW 7ROO 7\SH ! PC Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module (nn = 1 to 17).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-121 Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Copy Option Page 4-122 Yes Console Procedure /LQHV7UXQNV→7,( /LQHV→'LUHFWLRQ→Dial trunk no.→ (QWHU→Specify direction→(QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → → →Type trunk no.→ Specify direction→ → → 4 Procedure: Direction Console Display/Instructions ! PC Select TIE Lines.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-123 Additional Information PC Enter the tie trunk number. 'LUHFWLRQ (QWHU WUXQN IRU DVVLJQPW %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type: Trunk number [nnn] Slot and port number [sspp] Logical ID number #[nnn] Save your entry. Ã Select (QWHU.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-124 4 Tie Trunk Seizure Type Use this procedure to specify whether the seizure type of incoming or outgoing tie trunk is wink, delay, immediate, or automatic. NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems, delay-start tie trunks should be used for tandeming.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-125 4 Procedure: Tie Trunk Type Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH ! Select Tie Lines.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-126 Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Specify the tie trunk type. 7UXQN YYYY 6HOHFW 7UN W\SH :LQN 'HOD\ ,PPPHG ! $XWR 1H[W ([LW (QWHU xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4 = option name selected in Step 3 'HOD\ is used for private tie trunks in R6.0 or later systems.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-127 4 E&M Signal Use this procedure to specify the type of tie trunk signal, as follows: ■ E&M Mode: — 1S, Type 1 Standard. Tie trunks that are connected through the local telephone company. — 1C, Type 1 Compatible. Tie trunks that are connected directly to a system that uses 1S signaling. ■ Simplex Mode: — 5, Type 5 Simplex.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-128 4 Procedure: E&M Signal Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select Tie Lines.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-129 Additional Information Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Specify the type of signaling for the trunk. 7UXQN YYY xxx = trunk entered in Step 4 6HOHFW ( 0 7UN 6LJQDOLQJ 7\SH 6 7\SH & 7\SH 1H[W ([LW ! (QWHU Select 7\SH 6, 7\SH &, or 7\SH .
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-130 4 Summary: Dial Mode Programmable by System Manager Mode All Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3c, Incoming Trunks: Tie Factory Setting Rotary Valid Entries Rotary, Touch-tone Inspect Yes Copy Option Yes Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: /LQHV7UXQNV→7,( /LQHV→,QPRGH or 2XWPRGH→(QWU\ 0RGH→Dial line/trunk no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-131 Additional Information PC Select Tie Lines. /LQHV DQG 7UXQNV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! /6 *6 '6 35, 7,( /LQHV &RS\ 77 /6 'LVF 5HPRWH$FFVV ',' 3RROV ([LW 7ROO 7\SH Select Inmode signaling or Outmode signaling.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-132 ● Single Line Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify entry mode. Select (QWU\ 0RGH . ! Enter the number of the line/trunk. 7UXQN GLDO = option name selected in Step 3 (QWHU 7UXQNV Z 7RXFK7RQH 'HOHWH %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Ã Dial or type [nnn].
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-133 ◆ Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons on the system programming console. Select /LQHV /LQHV /LQHV /LQHV ! Specify touch-tone or rotary signaling for each line/trunk. Toggle the green LED on or off as required.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-134 Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: /LQHV7UXQNV→7,( /LQHV→'LDOWRQH→(QWU\ 0RGH → Dial trunk no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-135 Additional Information PC Select Dial Tone. 7,( 7UXQNV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 'LUHFWLRQ ,QPRGH ,QW\SH 2XWPRGH 2XWW\SH 'LDOWRQH ( 0 6LJQDO $QV6XSYU ([LW 'LVFRQQHFW Specify the line(s).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-136 Additional Information PC Assign or remove remote dial tone. Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH. You may continue to assign or remove remote dial tone from additional lines/trunks by repeating Steps 2 and 3. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW three times.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-137 4 Tie Trunk Answer Supervision Time Use this procedure to specify the tie trunk answer supervision time in milliseconds. This is the time limit for the called system to respond.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-138 Additional Information PC Select Tie Lines. /LQHV DQG 7UXQNV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! /6 *6 '6 35, 7,( /LQHV &RS\ 77 /6 'LVF 5HPRWH$FFVV ',' 3RROV ([LW 7ROO 7\SH Select Answer Supervision.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-139 Additional Information PC Erase the current number of milliseconds (nnnn). 7UXQN YYYY xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4 (QWHU $QV6XSHUYLVLRQ7LPH LQFUHPHQW OOOO ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Press Drop. 7I + Enter the answer supervision time (nnnn = 0 to 4,800 ms, increments of 20).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 4-140 4 Disconnect Time Use this procedure to specify the tie trunk disconnect time limit in milliseconds.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-141 Additional Information PC Select Tie Lines. /LQHV DQG 7UXQNV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! /6 *6 '6 35, 7,( /LQHV &RS\ 77 /6 'LVF 5HPRWH$FFVV ',' 3RROV ([LW 7ROO 7\SH Select Disconnect.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-142 Additional Information PC Erase the current disconnect time (nnnn). 7UXQN YYYY xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4 (QWHU 'LVFRQQHFW 7LPH OOOO ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Press Drop. 7I + Enter the disconnect time (nnnn = 140 to 2,400 ms).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-143 4 DID Trunks This section covers programming DID trunks and includes procedures for the following: ■ Block Assignment ■ DID Trunk Type ■ Disconnect Time ■ Expected Digits ■ Delete Digits ■ Add Digits ■ Signaling ■ Invalid Destination NOTE: These procedures apply to Hybrid/PBX mode only.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-144 Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: /LQHV7UXQNV→','→%ORFN→Dial trunk block no.→ (QWHU→ EQWU\ 0RGH→Type the line/trunk no.→ (QWHU or 'HOHWH→ ([LW→([LW→([LW To program a block of lines/trunks: /LQHV7UXQNV→','→%ORFN→Dial trunk block no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-145 Additional Information PC Select Block Assignment. 'LUHFW ,QZDUG 'LDO 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ %ORFN 'HOHWH'LJLW 7\SH $GG 'LJLWV 'LVFRQQHFW 6LJQDOLQJ ([SHFW'LJLW ,QYDO'VWQ ([LW ! Enter the trunk block (n = 1 or 2). ',' %ORFN $VVLJQPHQW (QWHU WKH EORFN QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [n].
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-146 ● Single Line Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Specify entry mode. Select (QWU\ 0RGH . ! PC Enter the trunk number. %ORFN Y x = block entered in Step 4 (QWHU OLQH WUXQN QXPEHU 'HOHWH ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Dial or type [nnn]. Assign or remove the trunk. Ã Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-147 ◆ Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify the DID trunks associated with 20 buttons on the system programming console. Select /LQHV /LQHV /LQHV /LQHV ! Assign or remove the trunk. Toggle the green LED on or off as required.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-148 4 Procedure: DID Trunk Type Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select DID.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-149 Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Specify immediate-start or wink-start. ',' %ORFN Y x = block number entered in Step 4 6HOHFW W\SH ,PPHG :LQN Select ,PPHG or :LQN. 1H[W ([LW ! (QWHU Continue to specify trunk type for the other trunk block or go to Step 8. Select 1H[W.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-150 Inspect No Copy Option Yes Console Procedure /LQHV7UXQNV→','→'LVFRQQHFW→Dial trunk no.→ (QWHU→Drop→Dial no. of ms→(QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure 7 → → Console/Display Instructions → + → 4 Procedure:Disconnect Time ! →Type trunk no.→ → → Type no. of ms→ Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-151 Additional Information PC Enter the DID trunk. ',' 'LVFRQQHFW 7LPH (QWHU WKH WUXQN QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type: Trunk number [nnn] Slot and port number [sspp] Logical ID number #[nnn] Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Ã Erase the current disconnect time (nnn).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-152 4 Expected Digits Use this procedure to tell the system how many digits are sent by the local telephone company. NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems, if the dialed digits received on a DID trunk correspond to a non-local extension number, the call is routed to that extension. ! SECURITY ALERT: In Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-153 4 Procedure: Expected Digits Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select DID.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-154 Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Erase the current number of expected digits (n). ',' %ORFN Y x = block entered in Step 4 (QWHU QXPEHU RI H[SHFWHG GLJLWV O ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Press Drop. 7/I Enter the number of expected digits (n = 1 to 4).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-155 4 Delete Digits Use this procedure to specify the number of leading digits to be deleted from the digits sent by the local telephone company. Use this procedure when the number of digits sent by the telephone company is greater than the number in the system numbering plan.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-156 Additional Information PC Select DID. /LQHV DQG 7UXQNV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! /6 *6 '6 35, 7,( /LQHV &RS\ 77 /6 'LVF 5HPRWH$FFVV ',' 3RROV ([LW 7ROO 7\SH Select Delete Digit.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-157 Additional Information PC Erase the current number of delete digits (n). ',' %ORFN Y x = block entered in Step 4 (QWHU QXPEHU RI GLJLWV WR GHOHWH O ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU 7/I Press Drop. Enter the number of digits to delete (n = 0 to 4). Ã Dial or type [n].
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-158 4 Add Digits Use this procedure to specify the number of leading digits that must be added to the digits sent by the local telephone company. Use this procedure when the number of digits sent by the telephone company is fewer than the number in the system numbering plan.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-159 Additional Information PC Select DID. /LQHV DQG 7UXQNV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! /6 *6 '6 35, 7,( /LQHV &RS\ 77 /6 'LVF 5HPRWH$FFVV ',' 3RROV ([LW 7ROO 7\SH Select Add Digits.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-160 Additional Information PC Erase the current number of added digits (nnn). ',' %ORFN Y x = block entered in Step 4 (QWHU GLJLWV WR DGG OOO ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU 7/I Press Drop. Enter the number of digits to add (n = 1 to 9999). Ã Dial or type [n].
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-161 4 Summary: Signaling Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not Required Planning Form Form 3d, Incoming Trunks: DID Factory Setting Rotary Valid Entries Rotary, Touch-tone Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure /LQHV7UXQNV→','→6LJQDOLQJ→Dial trunk block no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-162 Additional Information PC Select Signaling. 'LUHFW ,QZDUG 'LDO 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ %ORFN 'HOHWH'LJLW 7\SH $GG 'LJLWV 'LVFRQQHFW 6LJQDOLQJ ([SHFW'LJLW ,QYDO'VWQ ([LW ! Enter the trunk block (n = 1 or 2). ',' 6LJQDOLQJ (QWHU %ORFN QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [n]. Save your entry.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-163 Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice. 4 Invalid Destination Use this procedure to specify where to direct outside calls (received on DID trunks) for unassigned extension numbers.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 4-164 4 Procedure: Invalid Destination Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select DID.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-165 Additional Information Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-166 NOTE: If you are adding PRI facilities to an existing system, certain values must be set correctly. To inspect or change these values, see “DS1 Facilities” on page 4–87. Do not start these procedures until you have checked the following: ■ Type of DS1 Facility must be set to PRI. ■ Frame format must be specified correctly.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-167 The following rules apply to PRI tandem trunks in PBX or network mode: ■ A single unused B-channel group number is automatically assigned to all 23 B-channels on the trunk; B-channels may be removed or added (for more information, see “B-Channel Groups” on page 4–172).The group can still exist, even if it includes no B-channels.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-168 4 Procedure: Switch Type Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select PRI.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-169 Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Specify the switch type. 6ORW [[ 35, 6ZLWFK 7\SH 6HOHFW RQH (66 '(; ( (66 /HJHQG 1WZN '06 /HJHQG 3%; '06 Press the button or function key next to your selection. ([LW ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Copy Option Page 4-170 No Console Procedure /LQHV7UXQNV→35,→3KRQH1XPEHU →Dial trunk no.→ (QWHU→Drop→Dial telephone no.→(QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure 7 → → →Type trunk no.→ Type telephone no.→ → → ! + I→ 4 Procedure: Telephone Number Console Display/Instructions → Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-171 Additional Information PC Enter the line number. 35, 3KRQH 1XPEHU (QWHU OLQH QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type: Trunk number [nnn] Slot and port number *[sspp] Logical ID number #[nnn] Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Ã Erase the current telephone number (N) if one is assigned.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities B-Channel Groups Page 4-172 4 Use this procedure to perform the following: ■ Assign B-channels to a group. ■ Associate individual ISDN channels (that can place and receive calls) on the B-channels in each group. B-channels are partitioned into trunk groups when PRI service is ordered.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-174 4 Procedure: B-Channel Groups Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select PRI.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-175 Additional Information PC Enter the B-channel group number (nn = 1 to 80). % &KDQQHO *URXSV (QWHU JURXS QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [nn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Ã Enter the B-channel slot and port number.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-176 Additional Information PC Select Lines. % &KDQQHO *URXSV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ % &KDQQHOV ,QFRPLQJ5WJ /LQHV 1HWZRUN6HUY &RS\ 1XPEHU ([LW ! Enter the B-channel group number (nn = 1 to 80). % &KDQQHO *URXSV (QWHU JURXS QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [nn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-177 ● Single Line Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Specify entry mode. Select (QWU\ 0RGH . ! PC Enter a line number. % &KDQQHO *URXS YY xx = number entered in Step 12 (QWHU OLQH QXPEHU 'HOHWH ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Dial or type [nnn]. Assign or remove the line number from the B-channel group.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-178 ◆ Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify the block of 20 lines associated with 20 buttons on the system programming console. Select /LQHV /LQHV /LQHV /LQHV ! Assign the line(s) to the B-channel group. Toggle the green LED on or off as required.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-179 4 Summary: Network Service Programmable by.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-180 Additional Information PC Select B-Channel Groups. 35, /LQHV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 3KRQH1XPEHU 3URWRFRO % &KDQQO*US 'LDO3ODQ5WJ 1XPEU7R6HQG 2XWJRLQJ7EO 7HVW 7HO1XP 6ZLWFK7\SH ([LW ! Select Network Service.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-181 Additional Information ● ◆ ■▲ ✱ Specify a network service. 1HWZRUN 6HUYLFHV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ $7 7 7ROO (66 /RFDO 0&, 7ROO '06 /RFDO /HJHQG 8'3 0LVF ([LW PC If you select $7 7 7ROO, go to ● AT&T Toll Procedure. If you select (66 /RFDO, go to ◆ 5ESS Local Procedure.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-182 ◆ 5ESS Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify a 5ESS local service. % &KDQQHO *URXS [Y xx = number entered in Step 5 6HOHFW 2QH 287:$76 'LJWO 9LUW3ULY1HW ! ,1:$76 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Select 287:$76, 'LJWO , 9LUW3ULY1HW, or ,1:$76. Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-183 Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW four times. ▲ Miscellaneous Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify a service.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions Page 4-184 Additional Information ! Repeat Steps 5 through 7 of the main procedure for each miscellaneous service group number. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW four times. PC DMS-100 Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify a DMS-100 local service.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-185 Copy Telephone Number to Send 4 Use this procedure to indicate whether or not the telephone number to send to the network (for calls going out over ISDN lines assigned to a B-channel group) is copied from the number assigned to that channel. NOTE: In Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-186 Procedure: Copy Telephone Number to Send Console Display/Instructions ! 4 Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select PRI.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-187 Additional Information PC Enter the B-channel group number (nn = 1 to 80). % &KDQQHO *URXSV (QWHU JURXS QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Ã Dial or type [nn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-188 4 Incoming Routing Use this procedure to specify whether incoming routing is either by line appearance or according to dial plan. Dial Plan Routing is available in Hybrid/PBX mode only. In Release 6.0 and later systems, the Incoming Routing screen displays an option, Route Directly to UDP (Uniform Dial Plan). In Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-189 4 Procedure: Incoming Routing Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select PRI.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-190 Additional Information PC Enter the B-channel group number (nn = 1 to 80). 35, ,QFRPLQJ 5RXWLQJ (QWHU JURXS QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Ã Dial or type [nn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Specify the routing method to use for incoming calls.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-191 4 Telephone Number to Send Use this procedure to assign the telephone number to send to the network when outgoing calls are made on an ISDN line. If the person being called subscribes to an automatic number identification service, the number indicates who is calling.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-192 Procedure: Telephone Number to Send Console Display/Instructions ! 4 Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select PRI.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-193 ● Base Number with Extension Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Erase the current base number (N). %DVH 1XPEHU ZLWK ([W (QWHU PD[ RI GLJLW EDVH WHOHSKRQH QXPEHU 1 %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Press Drop. Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-194 ● Line Telephone Number Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Enter the line number (nnn). 3KRQH 1XPEHU WR 6HQG (QWHU OLQH QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [nnn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Ã Erase the current telephone number (n).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-195 4 Test Telephone Number Use this procedure to assign a test line or trunk telephone number for each 100D module installed in the control unit. The number assigned to the test line/trunk must be different from the numbers assigned to other channels in the same B-channel group. It must be identical to the number provided by the PRI service provider.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-196 Additional Information PC Select PRI. /LQHV DQG 7UXQNV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! /6 *6 '6 35, 7,( /LQHV &RS\ 77 /6 'LVF 5HPRWH$FFVV ',' 3RROV ([LW 7ROO 7\SH Select Test Telephone Number.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-197 Additional Information PC Erase the current test telephone number (N). 6ORW YY 7HVW 7HO 1XPEHU xx = number entered in Step 4 (QWHU WHVW QXPEHU 1 ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU 7/I Press Drop.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-198 If the network does not respond before the programmed time or count, the system takes the appropriate corrective action. The timers and counters are listed below. ■ T200 Timer. Times the delay in the link layer acknowledgment of a message sent from the system to the network over a D-channel. ■ T203 Timer.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-199 4 Summary: Timers and Counters Programmable by System Manager Mode All Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting See Table 4–2 Valid Entries See Table 4–2 Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure /LQHV7UXQNV→35,→3URWRFRO→7LPHUV→Dial slot no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-200 4 Procedure: Timers and Counters Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select PRI.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-201 Additional Information PC Enter the number of the slot in the control unit that contains the 100D module (nn = 1 to 17). 35, 7LPHUV (QWHU VORW QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [nn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Ã Select the timer/counter to change.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-202 Additional Information PC Erase the current setting. 'LVSOD\ GHSHQGV RQ WLPHU FRXQWHU VHOHFWHG ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Press Drop. Enter the new setting (see Table 4–2). Ã Dial or type [nnnn]. ! 7/I Continue to assign the setting to another slot or go to Step 11.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-203 4 Terminal Equipment Identifier Use this procedure to assign the link layer address of a piece of equipment connected to each D-channel. Normally, only one piece is connected and the system assumes that the Terminal Equipment Identifier (TEI) is 0. ! CAUTION: The value of the TEI rarely has to be changed.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-204 Additional Information PC Select PRI. /LQHV DQG 7UXQNV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ /6 *6 '6 7,( /LQHV ! 35, &RS\ 77 /6 'LVF 5HPRWH$FFVV ',' 3RROV ([LW 7ROO 7\SH Select Protocol.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-205 Additional Information Save your entry. PC Select (QWHU. ! Issue 1 February 1998 Erase the current identification number (nn). 6ORW YY 7(, xx = number entered in Step 5 (QWHU WHUPLQDO HTXLSPHQW LG QXPEHU OO ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Press Drop. Enter the new identification number (n = 0 to 63).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Dial Plan Routing Page 4-206 4 Dial plan routing provides a way to route incoming calls on a “per B-channel group” basis. An incoming call is routed by matching the incoming number (by service, number of digits, and pattern) and then optionally deleting and/or adding digits to direct the call to a specific endpoint.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-208 7 7 7 Type entry no.→ → + I→ To specify Delete Digits: → → → Type entry no.→ Type delete digits→ → → → → + I→ → + I→ To specify Total Digits: → → Type digits→ → → → To specify Add Digits: → → → Type add digits→ ! Type entry no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-209 Console Display/Instructions ! 35, 'LDO 3ODQ 5RXWLQJ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6HUYLFH must be programmed. Continue with Step 5. Then program other options. $GG 'LJLWV ❍ If you select 3DWWHUQV, go to Patterns Procedure. ❖ If you select 7RWDO'LJLWV , go to Total Digits Procedure. ■ If you select 'HOHWH'LJLW, go to Delete Digits Procedure.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-210 ✚ AT&T Toll Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select an AT&T service for the B-channel group. 'LDO 3ODQ 5WJ (QWU\ YY xx = number entered in Step 5 6HOHFW RQH ! 0HJDFRP $&&81(7 6'6 6RIW'HI1HWZ 0HJDFRP:$76 /RQJ'LVWQFH 08/7,48(67 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Press the button or function key next to your selection.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-211 ✖ Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select a service for the B-channel group. 'LDO 3ODQ 5WJ (QWU\ YY xx = number entered in Step 5 6HOHFW 2QH ,1:$76 'LJWO 9LUW3ULY1HW ! 287:$76 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Press the button or function key next to your selection.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-212 ✱ MCI Toll Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! PC Select a miscellaneous service.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-213 l Miscellaneous Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! PC Select a miscellaneous service. 'LDO 3ODQ 5WJ (QWU\ YY 6HOHFW RQH 2WKHU $Q\ 6HUYLFH 1R 6HUYLFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU ! Additional Information YY = number entered in Step 5 Select 2WKHU, $Q\ 6HUYLFH , or 1R 6HUYLFH. Continue to assign the service to another routing entry or go to Step 3.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-214 Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Program additional options by returning to Step 4 of the main procedure or go to Step 9. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW three times.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-215 ❍ Patterns Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Enter the entry number (nn = 0 to 15). 'LDO3ODQ5RXWLQJ3DWWHUQV Leave field blank to match any pattern. (QWHU HQWU\ QR %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [nn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions Page 4-216 Additional Information ! Program additional options by returning to Step 4 of the main procedure or go to Step 8. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW three times.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-217 Additional Information Continue to assign the digits to another routing entry or go to Step 6. Select 1H[W. PC Return to Step 3. The next dial plan routing entry is displayed on Line 1. ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-218 Additional Information PC Erase the current number of delete digits (nn). 'LDO 3ODQ 5WJ (QWU\ YY xx = number entered in Step 1 (QWHU QXPEHU RI GLJLWV WR GHOHWH OO ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Press Drop. 7I / Enter the new number of digits to delete (n = 0 to 14). Ã Dial or type [nn].
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-219 ▲ Add Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Enter the entry number (nn = 0 to 15). 'LDO3ODQ5WJ $GG'LJLWV (QWHU HQWU\ QR %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Ã Dial or type [nn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Erase the current number of add digits (nn).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Outgoing Tables Page 4-220 4 PRI provides tables that work in conjunction with personal lines, pools, and ARS tables to route calls. The following tables specify services for outgoing calls: ■ Call-by-Call. Selects an outgoing service, based on routing digits and the bearer capability (voice, data, or both) of the calling extension.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-222 Additional Information PC Select Outgoing Tables. 35, /LQHV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 3KRQH1XPEHU 3URWRFRO % &KDQQO*US 'LDO3ODQ5WJ 1XPEU7R6HQG 2XWJRLQJ7EO 7HVW 7HO1XP 6ZLWFK7\SH ([LW ! Select Network Selection tables.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-223 Additional Information PC Erase the current dial prefix (n). 1HWZN 6HOHFW7EO (QWU\ Y x = number entered in Step 5 (QWHU GLDO SUHIL[ XVH IRU ZLOG FDUG O ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU 7/ Press Drop. Enter the dial prefix. Ã Dial or type [n].
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Table 4–3.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-226 Additional Information PC Select Outgoing Tables. 35, /LQHV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 3KRQH1XPEHU 3URWRFRO % &KDQQO*US 'LDO3ODQ5WJ 1XPEU7R6HQG 2XWJRLQJ7EO 7HVW 7HO1XP 6ZLWFK7\SH ([LW ! Select the Special Services tables.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-227 ● Pattern Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Enter the table number (n = 0 to 7). 6SHFLDO 6HUYLFHV 7DEOH (QWHU HQWU\ QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [n]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Ã Erase the current pattern (nnnn).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-228 ◆ Operator Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Enter the table number (n = 0 to 7). 6SHFLDO 6HUYLFHV 7DEOH (QWHU HQWU\ QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Ã Dial or type [n]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Specify the type of operator.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-229 ■ Type Of Number Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Enter the table number (n = 0 to 7). 6SHFLDO 6HUYLFHV 7DEOH (QWHU HQWU\ QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Ã Dial or type [n]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Specify the type of operator.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-230 ▲ Delete Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Enter the table number (n = 0 to 7). 6SHFLDO 6HUYLFHV 7DEOH (QWHU HQWU\ QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Ã Dial or type [n]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Erase the current number of digits (n).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-231 4 Call-by-Call Service Table When a call is placed on a Call-by-Call B-channel group, a specific service is selected. The selected service depends on the match between the dialed digits and the table entries. A service must be specified; otherwise the entry is ignored. The Call-by-Call table can contain up to 10 entries.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-232 Valid Entries Pattern: up to eight digits Call Type: voice, data, both Service: AT&T Toll, 5ESS Local, MCI Toll, DMS-100 Local, Miscellaneous Delete Digits: 0 to 8 Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure To specify Patterns: /LQHV7UXQNV→35,→2XWJRLQJ7EO→&%& 6HUYLFH → 3DWWHUQV→Dial list no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-233 4 Procedure: Call-by-Call Service Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select PRI.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Select an option. &DOO%\&DOO 6HUYLFH 7DEOH 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ Page 4-234 Additional Information If you select 3DWWHUQV, go to ● Patterns Procedure. If you select 9RLFH 'DWD, go to ◆ Voice/Data Procedure. 1HWZRUN6HUY 'HOHWH'LJLW If you select 1HWZRUN6HUY, go to ■ Network Service Procedure.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-235 Additional Information PC Enter a pattern of up to eight digits (n = 0 to 9). Ã Dial or type [n]. ! Issue 1 February 1998 Assign a pattern to the next table or go to Step 6. Select 1H[W. Return to Step 3. The next table is displayed on Line 1. ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-236 Additional Information PC Specify voice, data, or both. &%& 6HUYLFHV /LVW Y x = number entered in Step 1 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 9RLFH 2QO\ 'DWD 2QO\ 9RLFH 'DWD 1H[W ([LW ! (QWHU Select 9RLFH 2QO\, 'DWD 2QO\, or 9RLFH 'DWD . Assign to another CBC services list or go to Step 5. Select 1H[W.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-237 Additional Information ✚ Specify a Network Service. &%& 1HWZRUN 6HUYLFH 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ $7 7 7ROO (66 /RFDO '06 /RFDO PC ✱▲◆ If you select $7 7 7ROO, go to ✚ AT&T Toll Procedure. If you select /RFDO, go to. 5ESS Local Procedure.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-238 5ESS Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify a local service. &%& 6HUYLFHV /LVW Y 6HOHFW 2QH x = number entered in Step 1 of the ■ Network Service Procedure. 287:$76 'LJWO 9LUW3ULY1HW 1H[W ([LW ! (QWHU Select 287:$76, 'LJWO , or 9LUW3ULY1HW.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-239 ▲ MCI Toll Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify an MCI Toll service. &%& ,6$ 6HUYLFHV /LVW Y 6HOHFW 2QH x = number entered in Step 1 of the ■ Network Service Procedure. 0&, 35,60 0&, 91(7 1H[W ([LW ! (QWHU Press the button or function key next to your selection.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 4-240 ✱ Miscellaneous Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Specify a service. &%& 6HUYLFH /LVW Y 6HOHFW RQH x = number entered in Step 1 of the ■ Network Service Procedure. 2WKHU Select 2WKHU or 1R 6HUYLFH. 1R 6HUYLFH 1H[W ([LW ! PC (QWHU If you select 1R 6HUYLFH, you have completed this procedure.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-241 Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW four times. ◆ DMS-100 Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify a DMS-100 Local service.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-242 ▲ Delete Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Enter the list number (n = 0 to 9). &%& 6HUY 'HOHWH 'LJLWV (QWHU OLVW QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Ã Dial or type [n]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Erase the current number of delete digits (n).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Page 4-243 4 BRI Facilities The procedures in this section provide the steps for programming the following options for Basic Rate Interface (BRI) facilities connected to an 800 NI-BRI module: ■ Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and Directory Number (DN) ■ Timers NOTES: 1. The 800 NI-BRI module is only available in Release 4.0 and later. 2.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Page 4-244 Console Procedure /LQHV7UXQNV→More→%5,→63,' '1.→Dial line/trunk no.→(QWHU→Dial SPID→(QWHU→Dial DN→ (QWHU→ ([LW→([LW PC Procedure → → Type SPID→ → →Type line/trunk no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-245 Additional Information PC Select Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and Directory Number (DN). %5, /LQHV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 63,' '1 7LPHUV ([LW ! Select 63,' '1. Enter the line/trunk number (nnn = 1 to 80). 63,' '1 (QWHU OLQH QXPEHU OOO %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [nnn].
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-246 Additional Information PC Erase the current DN. /LQH YYY xxx = line number selected in Step x. (QWHU '1 [[[[[[[[[[ ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU 7 Press Drop. + Enter the new DN. Ã Dial or type [xxxxxxxxxx]. ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Page 4-247 ■ T303 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the communications system sends a setup message to initiate an outgoing call. ■ T305 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the communications system sends a disconnect message to clear a call. ■ T308 Timer.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Page 4-248 Console Procedure /LQHV7UXQNV→More→%5,→7LPHUV→Select timer→ Drop→Dial no. of seconds or ms→(QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure 7 I → → → →Select timer→ Type no. of seconds or ms→ → → → 4 Procedure: Timers Console Display/Instructions ! + Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-249 Additional Information PC Select Timers. %5, /LQHV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 63,' '1 7LPHUV ([LW ! Select the timer to change. %5, 7LPHU 6HWWLQJV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 7 7LPHU 7 7LPHU 7 7LPHU 7 7LPHU 7 7LPHU ([LW ! Erase the current setting.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-250 4 Extensions 4 This section contains the following summaries: ■ Assigning outside lines or trunks to the buttons on a telephone (including lines and trunks used for loudspeaker paging). ■ Copying line button assignments from one extension to either an individual extension or a block of extensions.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-251 Individual lines/trunks can be assigned to a maximum of 64 extensions. Individual pools can be assigned as a Pool button on a maximum of 64 extensions.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-253 Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: ([WHQVLRQV →/LQHV 7UXQNV→Dial ext. no.→(QWHU→ EQWU\ 0RGH→Dial line/trunk no.→(QWHU→([LW→([LW To program a block of lines/trunks: ([WHQVLRQV →/LQHV 7UXQNV→Dial ext. no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Assign Intercom or System Access Buttons Page 4-255 4 Use this procedure to assign or change the assignments for Intercom (ICOM) buttons used to make and receive inside calls.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-256 Each System Access Ring or Voice on an individual telephone can be assigned as a Shared System Access (SSA) button on up to 16 other extensions. Shared SA buttons cannot be assigned to single-line telephones or other tip/ring equipment connected to an 016, 012, or 008 OPT module.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-257 Behind Switch Mode. An Intercom Ring, an Intercom Voice, and a prime line button are assigned to all analog multiline and MLX telephones, excluding operator positions. Two Intercom Ring buttons and a prime line button are assigned to tip/ring equipment connected to an 012 module.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-258 Analog Multiline Telephone without Built-in Speakerphone (BIS) or Hands Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI) Capability 4 Use this procedure to identify analog multiline telephones with flat membrane buttons that do not have built-in speakerphones (BIS) or Hands Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI) capability.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-259 Analog Multiline Telephones with Voice Announce to Busy 4 Use this procedure to dedicate a voice or voice pair to provide the Voice Announce to Busy feature on an analog multiline telephone. The extension number associated with the first (odd-numbered) extension jack in the pair is the telephone’s extension number.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Inspect No Copy Option No Page 4-261 Console Procedure $X[(TXLS→0XVLF2Q+ROG →Dial line/trunk no.→ (QWHU→([LW PC Procedure → →Type line/trunk no.→ ! → 4 Procedure: Music on Hold Console Display/Instructions Additional Information PC Select the Auxiliary Equipment menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-262 Additional Information PC Assign or remove the line/trunk assignment. Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW. 4 Loudspeaker Paging Use this procedure to identify the line/trunk jack reserved for connection of loudspeaker paging equipment.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-263 4 Procedure: Loudspeaker Paging Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Auxiliary Equipment menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 6\VWHP ! ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select Loudspeaker Page.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-264 4 Fax Machines Use this procedure to identify the extension jacks used to connect fax machines. In addition, you can specify the extensions to receive a message-waiting indication (MWI) when a fax transmission is received, and specify the length of time before the system registers that a fax has arrived and sends the messagewaiting indication.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-265 4 Maintenance Alarms Use this procedure to identify the line/trunk jack that connects an external alerting device that sounds or flashes when major maintenance problems occur.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-266 Additional Information PC Select Maintenance Alarms. $X[LOLDU\ (TXLSPHQW 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 0XVLF2Q+ROG 906 $$ /GVSNU 3J &7, /LQN )D[ 0DLQW$ODUPV ([LW ! Enter the line/trunk jack to which the maintenance alarm is connected.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-267 In addition, this procedure can be used to specify the number of rings before a call transferred by the voice messaging system is sent to the backup position for both integrated and generic VMI ports. The number of rings cannot be programmed for individual voice messaging systems; the single setting applies for all.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-268 Procedure: Voice Messaging System and Automated Attendant Console Display/Instructions ! 4 Additional Information PC Select the Auxiliary Equipment menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-269 Additional Information PC Enter the number of rings before calls are transferred to the backup position (n = 0 to 9). Use 0 to specify that calls are not transferred to backup position. Ã Dial or type [n]. ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Select Touch-Tone Duration.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-270 Additional Information PC Select Touch-Tone Interval. 906 $$ If you do not want to change the setting for touch-tone interval, you have finished this procedure. Go to Step 15. 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ 7UDQVIHU5WQ 77 'XUDWLRQ 77 ,QWHUYDO ([LW ! Erase the current touch-tone interval setting (xxx).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Link Page 4-271 4 Release 5.0 and later supports the use of an MLX port as a Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) link.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Page 4-272 NOTES: 1. Be sure to restore the board after finishing any programming activities. 2. If the primary and secondary cover buttons are not removed, the following message appears on the programming device (SPM or MLX-20L).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions PC Procedure Page 4-273 Busy out the board first: → →Type the slot no.→ → Program the CTI link: → →Type extension number→ → → → Restore the slot. This is a Maintenance step. Start the procedure from the main menu, not the System Programming screen. → →Dial the slot no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions ! Page 4-274 Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice. CTI Link Programming Errors 4 During the programming of the CTI link, entering an inappropriate extension number can give you an error message.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-275 Extension Selected Is System Programming Port 4 &7, /LQN ([WHQVLRQV ([WHQVLRQ YYYY )DLOHG ([WHQVLRQ 6HOHFWHG LV 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ 3RUW ([LW This message appears if you have chosen an extension that has been programmed as a system programming port, which is not permitted as the CTI link port.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Extensions Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-276 Port Reserved for Operator Positions 4 &7, /LQN ([WHQVLRQV ([WHQVLRQ YYYY )DLOHG 7KLV 3RUW LV 5HVHUYHG )RU 2SHUDWRU 3RVLWLRQV ([LW This message appears when the port that you are programming as the CTI link is on the Operator Position list (as a QCC or DLC).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-278 Console Procedure To program a single extension: More→/DQJXDJH→([WHQVLRQV →6LQJOH→Dial ext. no.→ (QWHU→Select a language→(QWHU→([LW→([LW To program a block of extensions: More→/DQJXDJH→([WHQVLRQV →%ORFN→Dial starting ext. no.→(QWHU→Dial ending ext. no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-281 The extensions you are copying to and from can be both operator and nonoperator positions. NOTE: Dial-out code restrictions are not copied.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features ARS Restriction Level For Extensions Page 4-282 4 Use this procedure to assign an ARS restriction level to an extension. Only outgoing calls are affected; users can receive inside, local, and toll calls on restricted extensions and can join any type of call in progress.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-283 4 Forced Account Code Entry Use this procedure to assign or remove Forced Account Code Entry. When this feature is programmed on individual extensions, the user must enter a 1- to 16-digit account code before making an outside call.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-284 4 Microphone Operation Use this procedure to enable or disable microphones on MLX telephones (except QCC operator positions). When the microphone is disabled, users cannot use the speakerphone to conduct conversations.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-285 4 Authorization Codes Use this procedure to assign an authorization code to an extension. The authorization code can range from 2 to 11 characters (0 - 9, ) and must be unique for each extension. An authorization code cannot begin with an “ .” NOTE: In Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 4-286 4 Remote Call Forwarding Use this procedure to allow or disallow the Remote Call Forwarding capability, which permits users to forward calls to an outside number. In Release 6.0 and later systems, Remote Call Forwarding must be enabled in order for an extension user to activate Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Copy Option Page 4-287 No Console Procedure ([WHQVLRQV →More→5HPRWH )UZG→Toggle LED On/Off or Dial ext. no.→(QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → → → → →Toggle letter 5 On/Off or type ext. no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Extension Features Copy Option Page 4-288 No Console Procedure ([WHQVLRQV →More→'HOD\ )UZG →Dial ext. no.→ (QWHU→Dial no. of delay rings→(QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → → →Type ext. no.→ Type no. of delay rings→ → → → 4 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Use this procedure to enable or disable trunk-to-trunk transfer at an extension.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Operator Features Page 4-289 4 Optional Operator Features The summaries in this section affect feature programming for both DLC and QCC operator positions and include the following: ■ Operator Hold Timer ■ DLC Operator Automatic Hold QCC operator features are covered in the next section.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Operator Features Page 4-290 4 DLC Operator Automatic Hold Use this procedure to enable or disable the DLC Operator Automatic Hold feature for DLC operator positions. When this feature is enabled, it prevents accidental call disconnection.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 4-293 4 Queue over Threshold Use this procedure to specify the maximum number of calls (threshold) in the QCC queue before system operators are notified with a tone that the threshold has been reached or exceeded. If the threshold is set to 0, operators are not notified.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 4-294 Console Procedure 2SHUDWRU →4XHXHG &DOO →(OYDWH3ULRU →Drop→ Dial no. of seconds→(QWHU→([LW→ ([LW PC Procedure 7 → → → → → + I→Type no. of seconds→ 4 Calls-In-Queue Alert Use this procedure to specify whether each QCC operator is notified (with a single beep) when a new call enters the QCC queue.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 4-297 4 Extended (Directed) Call Completion Use this procedure to specify one of the two basic options shown below for QCC operator positions with a DSS only: ■ Automatic Completion. Allows one-touch call transfer; that is, calls are transferred by touching only an extension button on the DSS.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 4-298 4 Summary: Return Ring Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 6a, Optional Operator Features Factory Setting 4 rings Valid Entries 1 to 15 rings Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure 2SHUDWRU →4XHXHG &DOO →5HWXUQ 5LQJ→Drop→ Dial no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 4-299 Console Procedure 2SHUDWRU →4XHXHG &DOO →More→4&& %DFNXS→Drop→ Dial ext. number→(QWHU→ ([LW→([LW PC Procedure 7 → → → → → + I→Type ext. no.→ → 4 Voice Announce Use this procedure to enable or disable Voice Announce for the QCC. Voice Announce is available only on a QCC in Release 4.0 and later.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Optional Group Features Page 4-300 4 This section contains programming summaries for the following optional features: ■ Pickup Groups ■ Group Paging ■ Group Coverage Member Assignments ■ Group Coverage Delay Interval (Release 4.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 4-301 Console Procedure ([WHQVLRQV →&DOO 3LFNXS→Dial pickup group no.→ (QWHU→Dial ext. no.→(QWHU→(QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → → →Type pickup group no.→ → →Type ext. no.→ 4 Group Paging Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension from a paging group.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Group Coverage Member Assignments Page 4-302 4 Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension from a coverage group. A coverage group is a group of senders. Coverage is an arrangement in which calls from a group of senders are redirected to one or more receivers. NOTE: This procedure assigns senders.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Page 4-303 Console Procedure ([WHQVLRQV →More→*URXS &RYHU →Dial group no.→ (QWHU→Dial ext. no.→(QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → → → → →Type group no.→ →Type ext. no.→ 4 Group Coverage Delay Interval Use this procedure to specify the number of rings before a call is sent to group coverage receivers.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Group Calling Member Assignments Page 4-304 4 Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension from a calling group. A calling group is used to direct calls to a group of people who all handle the same type of call. A single extension number is assigned to the group and is used by both inside and outside callers to reach the group.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Features Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool Assignments Page 4-305 4 Use this procedure to assign or remove lines, trunks, or pools (Hybrid/PBX only) that ring directly into a calling group. Incoming calls on each line/trunk or pool can be directed to only one calling group.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 4-307 4 Summary: Hunt Type Programmable by System Manager Mode All Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7d, Group Calling Factory Setting Circular hunting pattern Valid Entries Circular, Linear Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure ([WHQVLRQV →More→*US &DOOLQJ →+XQW 7\SH→ Dial calling group ext. no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 4-309 4 Group Calling Repeat Announcement Use this procedure to set the secondary announcement to repeat after the Announcement Interval.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Valid Entries Group numbers Inspect Yes Copy Option No Page 4-310 Console Procedure ([WHQVLRQV →More→*US &DOOLQJ →*US &RYHUDJH →Dial calling group ext. no.→(QWHU→Dial coverage group no.→ (QWHU→([LW→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → → → →Type calling group ext. no.→ Type coverage group no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Inspect No Copy Option No Page 4-314 Console Procedure ([WHQVLRQV →More→*US &DOOLQJ →;WQO $OHUW→ Dial calling group ext. no.→(QWHU→Drop→Dial ext. no. for alert→(QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure 7 I → → → + → →Type calling group ext. no.→ →Type ext. no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Copy Option Page 4-315 No Console Procedure ([WHQVLRQV →More→*US &DOOLQJ →More→*URXS→ Type Dial calling group ext. no.→(QWHU→Specify login type→(QWHU→(QWHU→([LW→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → → → Specify login type→ →Type calling group ext. no.→ → → → 4 Queue Control In Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 4-316 When a call arrives on one of the above facilities, it is added to the calling group queue, even if that queue has reached or exceeded the programmed maximum number of calls.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-318 4 Transfer Return Time Use this procedure to specify the number of times the telephone rings before a call transferred to another inside telephone is returned to the originator. A setting of 0 means that transferred calls are never returned to the originator.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-319 One-Touch Hold applies to incoming central office calls only. When the user presses an Auto Dial or DSS button to initiate a transfer, the outside caller is put on hold. The system automatically selects an intercom facility and dials the transfer destination. There is no transfer return function with this method.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-320 4 Transfer Audible Use this procedure to specify whether an outside caller hears ringing (also called ringback) or Music On Hold while being transferred. Inside callers always hear ringback during a transfer. NOTES: 1.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-321 4 Type of Transfer Use this procedure to specify whether the system automatically selects an Intercom or System Access Ring or Voice button when the Transfer button, or an Auto Dial or DSS button (for One-Touch Transfer) is pressed.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-322 Console Procedure 2SWLRQV→&DPS2Q→Drop→Dial no. of seconds→ (QWHU→([LW PC Procedure 7 → → + I→Type no. of seconds→ → 4 Call Park Return Time Use this procedure to specify the number of seconds before a call put on hold with the Park feature is returned to the originator.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-323 Factory Setting 2 rings Valid Entries 1 to 6 rings Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure 2SWLRQV→'HOD\ 5LQJ→Drop→Dial no. of rings→ (QWHU→([LW PC Procedure 7 → → + I→Type no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-324 4 Extension Status Use this procedure to specify whether the Extension Status (ES) feature is used in Hotel mode or Group Calling/Call Management System (CMS) mode. The calling mode affects the meaning of the LEDs and the use of Auto Dial or DSS buttons when the DLC operator position is in Extension Status mode.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-325 4 SMDR Language Use this procedure to change the language of the SMDR reports. It applies to Releases 1.1 and later only. The default report language is the same as that set for the system language. See “System Language” on page 5.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Copy Option Page 4-326 No Console Procedure 2SWLRQV→60'5→)RUPDW→%DVLF 60'5 or ,6'1 60'5→ (QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → → → → or → → 4 SMDR Call Length Use this procedure to set the minimum time length of a call before it is recorded on SMDR call reports. NOTES: 1.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-327 4 SMDR Calls Recorded on Call Report Use this procedure to specify whether SMDR information should be recorded for both incoming and outgoing calls or for outgoing calls only. NOTE: This procedure affects call recording for calls on networked private trunks.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Inspect No Copy Option No Page 4-328 Console Procedure 2SWLRQV→60'5→$XWK &RGH →+RPH ([WHQVLRQ 1XPEHU or $XWKRUL]DWLRQ &RGH →(QWHU→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → → → → or → → 4 SMDR Talk Time In Release 4.2 and later systems, the Talk field was added to the SMDR call record.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-329 4 Inside Dial Tone Use this procedure to set the inside (system) dial tone to be either different from, or the same as, the outside line/trunk dial tone. NOTE: The inside dial tone must be the same as the outside dial tone when the internal dial tone is not recognized by software applications or modems.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-330 4 Reminder Service Cancel Use this procedure to set the time of day when all programmed Reminder Service calls are automatically canceled. To deactivate Reminder Service Cancel, erase the currently programmed time and do not enter a new time.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-331 Redirect Outside Calls to Unassigned Extension Numbers 4 Use this procedure to specify the extension number to receive redirected calls. Redirected calls include calls made to unassigned numbers by remote access users, by users on DID trunks (Hybrid/PBX only), or by users on dial-in tie trunks.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-332 Host System Dial Codes for Behind Switch Mode 4 Use this procedure to assign the host system dial codes for the Transfer, Conference, and Drop features. When multiline telephone users press the Transfer, Conference, or Drop button, a signal is sent to the host service and the communications system features are not accessed.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-333 4 Recall Timer Use this procedure to designate the length of the timed flash that is sent when Recall is used to disconnect a call and get a new dial tone without hanging up. Both the interval of the timed flash and how Recall works depend on the type of telephone and system operating mode.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-334 4 Allowed Lists Use this procedure to establish Allowed Lists. These lists are telephone numbers that can be dialed from specified telephones, regardless of any calling restrictions that are assigned to the telephones. A maximum of eight lists (numbered 0 through 7) with a maximum of 10 numbers each (numbered 0 through 9) are allowed.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures System Features Page 4-335 4 Assign Allowed Lists to Extensions Use this procedure to assign individual extensions access to established Allowed Lists. More than one Allowed List can be assigned to an extension.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Remote Access Features Page 4-337 4 This section covers the following Remote Access features: ! ■ Remote Access over Networked Tandem and Tie Trunks (Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-338 levels, protect access codes, and distribute access codes only to individuals who have been fully advised of the sensitive nature of the access information. Common carriers are required by law to collect their tariffed charges.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Remote Access over Networked Tandem PRI and Tie Trunks Page 4-339 4 In Release 6.0 and later systems, Hybrid/PBX mode only, an ARS call originating at a remote, networked communications system can arrive on a networked tie or PRI trunk of the local system and receive remote-access treatment automatically.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-340 2. Specify that all tie trunks (that is, networked tandem tie trunks) and/or all non-tie trunks (that is, all PRI tandem trunks) will not require barrier codes.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-342 Additional Information PC Select Lines and Trunks. 5HPRWH $FFHVV ',6$ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ /LQHV7UXQNV $XWR4XHXLQJ 1RQ 7,( 7,( /LQHV %DUULHU&RGH ([LW ! Enter the line/trunk for remote access usage (nnnn).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-343 Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-344 Procedure: Remote Access Automatic Callback Console/Display Instructions ! 4 Additional Information PC Select the Lines and Trunks menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select Remote Access.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-345 Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW twice.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-346 ■ ARS Facility Restriction Level (Hybrid/PBX only). Allows or disallows use of outgoing trunks by assigning a facility restriction level from 0 through 6. The FRL ranges from 0 (most restrictive) to 6 (least restrictive).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-347 To assign/remove Disallowed Lists: /LQHV7UXQNV→5HPRWH$FFVV →1RQ 7,( or 7,( /LQHV→ 'LVDOORZ/VW→Dial list no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-348 Additional Information PC Specify whether you are establishing/removing a class of restrictions for non-tie lines/trunks or for tie and DID trunks. 5HPRWH $FFHVV ',6$ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ /LQHV7UXQNV $XWR4XHXLQJ 1RQ 7,( 7,( /LQHV %DUULHU&RGH Select 1RQ 7,( or 7,( /LQHV .
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-349 ● Restriction Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Specify the restriction type. 5HPRWH $FFHVV 6HOHFW RQH 8QUHVWULFWHG 2XWZDUG UHVWULFW 7ROO 5HVWULFW ([LW ! (QWHU Select 8QUHVWULFWHG , 2XWZDUG 5HVWULFW, or 7ROO 5HVWULFW. Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-350 ■ Allowed or Disallowed Lists Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Enter the list you want to assign (n = 0 to 7).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-351 The systemwide barrier code length can range from a minimum of 4 characters to a maximum of 11 characters. The default length is 7. If you enter a length that is less than 4 or greater than 11, the entry is erased and the previous entry displays on the screen.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-353 Additional Information PC Select Remote Access. /LQHV DQG 7UXQNV ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! /6 *6 '6 35, 7,( /LQHV &RS\ 77 /6 'LVF 5HPRWH$FFVV ',' 3RROV ([LW 7ROO 7\SH Select an option.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-354 ● Establish or Remove Barrier Code Requirements Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select Barrier Code. 5HPRWH $FFHVV = option name selected in Step 3 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ %DUULHU&RGH 'LVDOORZ/VW 5HVWULFWLRQ $56 5HVWUFW $OORZ /LVW ([LW ! Specify barrier code requirement.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Page 4-355 ◆Change Barrier Code Length Procedure When the systemwide barrier code length is changed, all barrier codes are erased and must be reassigned. Users are denied access to remote access trunks until new barrier codes are assigned. Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Erase the current code length (nn).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-356 ◆ Change Barrier Code Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Enter the barrier code ID number (nn = 1 to 16). 5HPRWH$FFVV %DUULHU&RGH (QWHU %DUULHUFRGH QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Ã Dial or type [nn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Erase the current code (nnnn).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Remote Access with Barrier Codes Page 4-357 4 Use this procedure to change the class of restriction for individual remote access barrier codes. The class of restriction assigned to each barrier code allows or denies the use of the following system features: ■ Restriction.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Inspect No Copy Option No Page 4-358 Console Procedure /LQHV7UXQNV→5HPRWH$FFVV →%DUULHU&RGH→ 5HVWULFWLRQ→Dial barrier code no.→(QWHU→Select restriction→(QWHU→$56 5HVWULFW→Dial barrier code no.→(QWHU→Drop→Dial FRL value→(QWHU→ $OORZ /LVW or 'LVDOORZ /LVW→Dial barrier code no.→ (QWHU→Dial list no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-359 Additional Information PC Select Barrier Code Access. 5HPRWH $FFHVV ',6$ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ /LQHV7UXQNV $XWR4XHXLQJ 1RQ 7,( 7,( /LQHV %DUULHU&RGH ([LW ! ●◆■ Select an option.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-360 Additional Information PC Specify a restriction. %DUULHU &RGH YY xx = barrier code number entered in Step 1 6HOHFW RQH 8QUHVWULFWHG 2XWZDUG 5HVWULFW 7ROO 5HVWULFW 1H[W ([LW ! (QWHU Select 8QUHVWULFWHG , 2XWZDUG 5HVWULFW, or 7ROO 5HVWULFW.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-361 Additional Information PC Erase the current ARS FRL (n). %DUULHU &RGH YY xx = barrier code entered in Step 1 (QWHU $56 5HVWULFWLRQ OHYHO Q ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Press Drop. 7 + Enter a new ARS FRL (n = 0 to 6). Ã Dial or type [n].
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Remote Access Features Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-362 Additional Information Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Enter the number of the Allowed List or Disallowed List you want to assign or remove (n = 0 to 7).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Local Users Calling out on Networked Lines Page 4-364 4 To implement this operation on a local system where callers will use the trunks on a remote system, use the procedures outlined in this section. The relevant topics provide additional details. 1.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-365 4 1 + 7-Digit Dialing Requirements Use this procedure for calls placed within the same (home) area code as the system. The procedure allows you to specify whether or not the local telephone company requires a 1 to precede the 7-digit number. The two available settings are: ■ Within Area Code.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-366 Additional Information PC Select Automatic Route Selection. 7DEOHV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ $OORZ/LVW $56 $OORZ7R 8'3 5RXWLQJ 'LVDOORZ 'LVDOORZ7R ([LW ! Select ARS 1+7 Digit Dial.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-367 4 ARS Tables Use this procedure for the following tasks: ■ To specify type of table (6-digit, area code, exchange, or 1 + 7-digit number) ■ To add or change area codes to be included in each table ■ To add or change exchanges to be included in each table A maximum of 16 tables can be established, numbered 1 through 16.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection PC Procedure Console/Display Instructions →Select table type→ →Type no.→ 4 Procedure: ARS Tables ! 7 → → →Type table no.→ →Type entry no.→ → + → → Page 4-368 Additional Information PC Select the Tables menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-369 Additional Information PC Enter the table number (nn = 1 to 16). $56 7DEOH 7\SH (QWHU WDEOH QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [nn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Specify a table type.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-370 Additional Information PC Erase the current entry (nnn). $56 7DEOH YY (QWU\ YYY (QWHU DUHD FRGH RU xx = table number entered in Step 4 xxx = entry number entered in Step 8 H[FKDQJH QQQ ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU 7I Press Drop.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-371 In Release 6.0 and later systems, if you are setting up ARS to allow local users to make cost-efficient calls on trunks connected to remote systems, you may wish to check with the remote system manager to ensure that routing stipulates the most cost-effective timing based on the rates at the remote location.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-372 Additional Information PC Select Automatic Route Selection. 7DEOHV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ $OORZ/LVW $56 $OORZ7R 8'3 5RXWLQJ 'LVDOORZ 'LVDOORZ7R ([LW ! Select Subpattern B Start.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-373 Additional Information PC Erase the current start time (xxxx). 6XESDWWHUQ % 6WDUW 7LPH (QWHU VWDUW WLPH KRXU DQG PLQ [[[[ %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Press Drop. Ã Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! + Enter the start time for Subpattern B (hh = 00 to 23, mm = 00 to 59).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-374 Additional Information PC Erase the current stop time (xxxx). 6XESDWWHUQ % 6WRS 7LPH (QWHU VWRS WLPH KRXU DQG PLQ [[[[ 7I %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Press Drop. + Enter the stop time for Subpattern B (hh = 00 to 23, mm = 00 to 59). Ã Dial or type [hhmm].
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-375 2. For Dial 0 and Special Numbers N11 calls routed from systems with only private trunks, the private trunks must be assigned to the main pool, and the ARS access code of the remote system must be prepended to the dialed number (see “Dial 0 Table” on page –393 and “N11 Special Numbers Tables” on page –390).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-376 Additional Information PC Select Automatic Route Selection. 7DEOHV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ $OORZ/LVW $56 $OORZ7R 8'3 5RXWLQJ 'LVDOORZ 'LVDOORZ7R ([LW ! Select pool routing for Subpattern A or B.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Enter a pool dial-out code of up to 3 digits on which to route calls. $56 3RRO 7DEOHYY 5RXWHY (QWHU SRRO GLDORXW FRGH ! Page 4-377 %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU xx = table number entered in Step 1 x = route number entered in Step 1 Dial or type [nnn].
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Enter a pool dial-out code of up to 3 digits on which to route calls. $56 3RRO YY Y (QWHU SRRO GLDORXW FRGH ! Page 4-378 %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU xx = table number entered in Step 1 x = route number entered in Step 1 Ã Dial or type [nnn].
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-379 4 Summary: Facility Restriction Level Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3f, Automatic Route Selection Tables Form 3g, Automatic Route Selection Default and Special Numbers Tables Factory Setting 3 (beginning with Release 3.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-380 Additional Information PC Select Automatic Route Selection. 7DEOHV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ $OORZ/LVW $56 $OORZ7R 8'3 5RXWLQJ 'LVDOORZ 'LVDOORZ7R ([LW ! Select Facility Restriction Level for Subpattern A or B.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-381 Additional Information PC Enter the restriction level (n = 0 to 6). $56 7DEOH YY 5RXWH Y (QWHU UHVWULFWLRQ OHYHO xx = table number entered in Step 1 x = route number entered in Step 1 ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Dial or type [n].
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-382 Additional Information PC Enter the restriction level (n = 0 to 6). $56 7DEOH [[ 5RXWH [ (QWHU UHVWULFWLRQ OHYHO xx = table number entered in Step 1 x = route number entered in Step 1 ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Ã Dial or type [n].
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-383 NOTES: 1. Pool routes must be programmed before you assign digit absorption. 2. In Release 6.0 and later systems where remote users will dial out via networked lines, absorbed digits are often useful.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-384 Additional Information PC Select Automatic Route Selection. 7DEOHV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ $OORZ/LVW $56 $OORZ7R 8'3 5RXWLQJ 'LVDOORZ 'LVDOORZ7R ([LW ! Select absorb digits for Subpattern A or B.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-385 Additional Information PC Erase the current number of absorbed digits (nn). $56 7DEOH YY 5RXWH Y (QWHU WDEOH DEVRUSWLRQ xx = table number entered in Step 1 x = route number entered in Step 1 GLJLWV QQ ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Press Drop.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-386 Additional Information Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Erase the current number of absorbed digits (nn).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-387 4 Other Digits Use this procedure to specify other (extra) digits that must be added by the system to the beginning of the number dialed by the caller, when calls are placed on an identified route. NOTES: 1. Pool routes must be programmed before you assign other digits. 2. In Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-388 4 Procedure: Other Digits Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Tables menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select Automatic Route Selection.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-389 Additional Information Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Erase the current number of other digits (n). $56 7DEOH YY 5RXWH Y ! (QWHU RWKHU GLJLWV xx = table number entered in Step 4 x = route number entered in Step 4 Q ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU Press Drop.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-390 4 N11 Special Numbers Tables Use this procedure to specify Facility Restriction Level (FRL) and/or digits that must be added when emergency numbers in the N11 Special Numbers table are dialed (for example, 411, 811, or 911). Subpattern B, absorb, and pool routing cannot be programmed for the N11 Special Numbers tables.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-391 Procedure: N11 Special Numbers Tables Console/Display Instructions ! 4 Additional Information PC Select the Tables menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select Automatic Route Selection.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-392 Additional Information PC ●◆ Select an option. $56 6SHFO 1XPEHUV 7DEOH 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ $56 )5/ To change the current Facility Restriction Level, select $56 )5/ and go to ● Change FRL Procedure.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-393 ◆ Other Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions ! Additional Information Erase the current other digits (x). $56 7DEOH YY xx = table number entered in Step 4 6HOHFW RQH 'LJLW $UHD &RGH ([FKDQJH ([LW ! PC (QWHU Select 'LJLW, $UHD &RGH , ([FKDQJH, or .
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-395 Additional Information PC Go to the second screen of the ARS menu. $56 ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! $56 'LDO 6XE$ $EVRUE $56 ,QSXW 6XE $ 'LJLW 6XE $ 3RROV 6XE % 6WDUW 6XE $ )5/ 6XE % 6WRS ([LW 6XE % 3RRO Press More. Select Dial 0.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-396 ● ARS Pool Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Erase the current pool dial-out code (xxx). 'LDO 3RRO (QWHU SRRO GLDORXW FRGH [[[ %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Press Drop. Ã Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! + Enter a pool dial-out code of up to 3 digits. Dial or type [nnn].
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-397 Additional Information Save your entry. PC Select (QWHU. ! Issue 1 February 1998 Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW three times. ■ ARS Digits Procedure Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Erase the current other digits (x).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 4-398 4 Voice and/or Data Routing Use this procedure to route voice, data, or voice and data. The voice/data specification is used mainly in conjunction with PRI. See “PRI Facilities” on page 4–165 especially its subtopic, “Outgoing Tables” on page 4–220. Voice/data routes can be associated with Subpattern A or Subpattern B.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-399 Additional Information PC Select Automatic Route Selection. 7DEOHV 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ $OORZ/LVW $56 $OORZ7R 8'3 5RXWLQJ 'LVDOORZ 'LVDOORZ7R ([LW ! Go to the second screen of the ARS menu.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Automatic Route Selection Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-400 Additional Information Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Select the appropriate capability.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-401 4 This section includes programming procedures for assigning Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) routing, available for Hybrid/PBX mode in Release 6.0 and later systems only. UDP routing is very similar to ARS, except that it is slightly simpler.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-402 4 UDP Pool Routing Before beginning this procedure, assign tandem tie or PRI trunks to pools. To do so, see “Trunks to Pools Assignment” on page 4–72. In UDP routing, routes (1–4) are associated with patterns, which are assigned first. Each route has various attributes (FRL, digit absorption, and so on) for call delivery.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Procedure: UDP Pool Routing Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-403 4 Additional Information PC Select the Tables menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select UDP Routing.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing 4 Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-404 Additional Information PC Enter the route number (n = 1 to 4). 8'3 3DWWHUQ YY xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 (QWHU URXWH QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [n]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Ã Select Pool.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-405 Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW four times. UDP Facility Restriction Level 4 Use this procedure to assign a Facility Restriction Level (FRL) to each UDP route.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Inspect No Copy Option No Page 4-406 Console Procedure 7DEOHV→8'3 5RXWLQJ→Dial pattern no.→(QWHU→ Dial route no.→(QWHU→)5/→Dial restriction level→ (QWHU→([LW→([LW→([LW→([LW PC Procedure → → → →Enter pattern no.→ →Type route no.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing 4 Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-407 Additional Information Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! PC Enter the route number (n = 1 to 4). 8'3 3DWWHUQ YY xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 (QWHU URXWH QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [n]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-408 Additional Information PC Continue to enter a restriction level for another route in the pattern or go to Step 10. Select 1H[W. Return to Step 8. The next route number is displayed on Line 1. ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-410 Additional Information PC Enter the number of the pattern (nn = 1 to 20). 8'3 5RXWLQJ (QWHU SDWWHUQ QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [nn]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Ã Enter the route number (n = 1 to 4).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-411 Additional Information PC Erase the current number of absorbed digits (nn). 8'3 3DWWHUQ YY 5RXWH Y (QWHU QXPEHU DEVRUSWLRQ xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 x = route number entered in Step 1 GLJLWV QQ ! %DFNVSDFH 1H[W ([LW (QWHU 7 I Press Drop or select %DFNVSDFH.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-412 4 UDP Other Digits Use this procedure to specify other (extra) digits that must be added by the system to the beginning of the dialed digits when calls are placed on an identified route.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-413 4 Procedure: UDP Other Digits Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Select the Tables menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select UDP Routing.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-414 Additional Information PC Enter the route number (n = 1 to 4). 8'3 3DWWHUQ YY xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 (QWHU URXWH QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [n]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Ã Select Digits.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-415 Additional Information PC Continue to specify other digits for another route in the current pattern or go to Step 11. Select 1H[W. Return to Step 8. The next route number is displayed on Line 1. ! Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Page 4-416 Procedure: UDP Voice and/or Data Routing Console/Display Instructions ! 4 Additional Information PC Select the Tables menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Select UDP Routing.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures UDP (Uniform Dial Plan) Routing Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-417 Additional Information PC Enter the route number (n = 1 to 4). 8'3 3DWWHUQ YY xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 (QWHU URXWH QXPEHU %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU Dial or type [n]. Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Ã Select Data.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-418 Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW four times.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Night Service with Outward Restriction Page 4-420 4 Use this procedure to prevent unauthorized use of telephones after hours. This feature requires the user to enter a password to make a call when Night Service is activated, unless one of the lists below applies.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Night Service Night Service with Time Set Page 4-421 4 Use this procedure to specify the time of day and the days of the week when Night Service is to be activated and deactivated. Enter the time of day as 4 digits, using 24-hour notation. Enter the day of the week as a single digit (0 to 6), with 0 being Sunday.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 4-423 4 Labeling This section contains summaries on adding or changing labels for the following: ■ Extension Directory ■ Lines or Trunks ■ Posted Message ■ Group Calling ■ System Speed Dial Directory For detailed information see Chapter 3, “Common Administrative Procedures.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 4-424 Console Procedure More→/DEHOLQJ→'LUHFWRU\→([WHQVLRQ→ Dial ext. no.→(QWHU→Drop→Enter label→(QWHU→ ([LW→([LW→([LW PC Procedure 7 → → Type label→ → → →Type ext. no.→ → → → + I→ 4 Lines or Trunks Use this procedure to establish alphanumeric system labels for display telephone users to identify the line or trunk being used.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 4-425 4 Summary: Posted Message Programmable by System Manager, Integrated Administration Mode All Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 8a, Label Form: Posted Message Factory Setting First 10 messages Valid Entries 1 to 20 Inspect No Copy Option No Console Procedure More→/DEHOLQJ→3RVW0HVVDJH→Dial message no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Labeling Page 4-426 4 System Speed Dial Directory Use this procedure to establish System Speed Dial numbers for all system users. You can also use this procedure to enter the alphanumeric labels shown on display telephones (for the System Directory feature of the MLX telephone).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Print Reports Page 4-427 4 Print Reports Use the procedures in this section to change the language for system reports and to print the system reports. 4 Report Language Use this procedure to change the language of the system reports. It applies to Release 1.1 and higher.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Data Features Page 4-431 4 Data Features This section covers the programming procedure for analog multiline telephones connected by a General-Purpose Adapter (GPA) to a data terminal and modem. Other data programming procedures can be found in earlier sections of this book (see Table 4–5), with the exception of ringing options.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Data Features Page 4-432 Analog Multiline Telephones at Data Workstations 4 Use this procedure to dedicate a pair of extension jacks to provide the voice and data to an analog data workstation. The extension number associated with the first (odd-numbered) extension jack in the pair is the telephone’s extension number.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Common Administrative Procedures Data Features 4 Page 4-433 Procedure: Analog Multiline Telephones at Data Workstations 4 Console Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Data Features Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-434 Additional Information Assign or remove the voice/data pair. PC Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH. You may continue to assign or remove additional voice/data pairs by repeating Steps 4 and 5. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Data Features Page 4-435 4 Procedure: 2B Data Console Display Instructions ! Additional Information PC Go to the second screen of the system programming menu. 6\VWHP 3URJUDPPLQJ ! 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ ! 6\VWHP ([WHQVLRQV 6\V5HQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 2SHUDWRU 7DEOHV /LQHV7UXQNV $X[(TXLS ([LW 1LJKW6UYFH Press More. Select Data.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Integrated Administration Console Display/Instructions ! Page 4-436 Additional Information PC Assign or remove the 2B data pair. Select (QWHU or 'HOHWH You may continue to assign or remove additional 2B data pairs by repeating Steps 4 and 5. ! Return to the System Programming menu. Select ([LW two times.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Integrated Administration Table 4–6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Integrated Administration Table 4–7. Issue 1 February 1998 Page 4-439 Database Reconciliation Rules Extension appears in ... Switch Application Database Action yes yes None yes no Extension is added to database. Can be added as AUDIX Voice Power or AUDIX Voice Power/FAX Attendant subscriber through Extension Directory screen.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Memory Card Page 4-440 4 A PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) interface slot is present on the processor module. The slot is a standard interface through which information can be added to or obtained from the system using a memory card. The PCMCIA interface slot accepts one memory card at a time.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-441 Figure 4–4.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-442 4 Inserting the Card To insert the card, hold the card with the Lucent logo facing up and the arrow pointing toward the slot. See Figure 4–5 for the proper way to insert the memory card into the slot on the processor module.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Memory Card Formatting Page 4-443 4 The memory card may have to be formatted before you begin any manual or automatic backup procedures. This section details the screens and messages that appear during the format procedure. ! CAUTION: Formatting overwrites previous data on the memory card.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-444 4 Format Warning )RUPDW 0HPRU\ &DUG $OO GDWD RQ FDUG ZLOO EH '(/(7(' 'R \RX ZDQW WR FRQWLQXH"
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-445 4 Backup Use this procedure to make a copy of your customized system data. You should create a backup at least three times during system installation (so that programmed information is not lost), and once after each system upgrade, service technician visit, or major system reconfiguration.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-446 4 Automatic Backup Use this procedure to schedule automatic daily or weekly backups of your customized system data. See “Backup” on page –282 for detailed information and a list of errors that can occur during a backup procedure.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-447 4 Restore Use this procedure to restore system conditions that were backed up onto a translation memory card. The information in a backup file on the translation card is copied to the system. The restore procedure is necessary under the following conditions: ■ System RAM is corrupt.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Copy Option Page 4-448 No Console Procedure Insert memory card→6\VWHP→%DFN 5HVWRUH → 5HVWRUH→Select restore file→
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Issue 1 February 1998 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-449 Console/Display Instructions ! Additional Information Inspect the backup files present on the Memory Card. 0HP&DUG 5HVWRUH )LOHV ! Press More to view additional files. DDDDDDDDD 00 '' ++ 00 aaaaaaaaaa, bbbbbbbbb = filenames xxxx = System Programming Port MM/DD HH:MM = date and time X.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Console/Display Instructions ! Page 4-450 Additional Information PC Observe the restore progress screen. 5HVWRUH 1 n = filename selected in Step 5 5HVWRUH LQ 3URJUHVV 3OHDVH :DLW ! Observe the restore file validation screen.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Card Removed after Confirmation Page 4-451 4 0HPRU\ &DUG 5HVWRUH 5(6725( ,6 &$1&(/(' 6\VWHP LV '2:1 The memory card was removed from the PCMCIA interface slot while the restore was in progress. The restore is aborted and the system performs a System Erase (frigid start). You must reinsert the memory card and repeat the restore procedure.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Card Failure Before Confirmation Page 4-452 4 0HPRU\ &DUG 5HVWRUH 5HVWRUH )DLOXUH 7U\ D GLIIHUHQW ILOH RU D QHZ 0HPRU\ &DUG ([LW If the restore fails because the card is damaged, repeat the restore procedure using a different file and/or memory card.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 4 Common Administrative Procedures Memory Card Page 4-453 4 Board Mismatch 5HVWRUH Q n = filename selected 5HVWRUH )DLOXUH 5(6725( ,6 &$1&(/(' %RDUG PLVPDWFK EHWZHHQ FRQWURO XQLW DQG ILOH ([LW A mismatch exists between the hardware components present on the current system and the hardware components reflected in the backup file. The restore is aborted.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Introduction Page 5-2 5 Introduction Centralized telephone programming allows the system manager to program any feature that can be programmed by individual telephone users, or by the system operator, onto another telephone in the system. Any feature that can be programmed at an individual telephone can be programmed using centralized telephone programming.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Centralized Telephone Programming Access to Centralized Telephone Programming 5 Access to Centralized Telephone Programming Page 5-3 5 Access the Centralized Programming menu from the System Programming menu. Centralized programming is performed by selecting features from the display or by using programming codes. Follow the procedure below to access the Centralized Programming menu.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 5-4 The following sections explain the use of menu selections for programming a single extension (Program Extension), and for using one extension as a template for programming several extensions of the same type (Copy Extension).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension 5 Page 5-5 Console Display/Instructions ! Issue 1 February 1998 Additional Information PC Select Program Extension. &HQWUDOL]HG 3URJUDPPLQJ 0DNH D VHOHFWLRQ _ 3URJUDP ([W &RS\ ([W ([LW ! (QWHU Specify the extension you want to program. &HQWUDOL]HG 3URJUDPPLQJ (QWHU H[WHQVLRQ %DFNVSDFH ([LW ! (QWHU SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Issue 1 February 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Console Display/Instructions ! Page 5-6 Additional Information PC Select the line button to which you want to assign the feature. 6HOHFW %XWWRQ xxxx = extension entered in Step 2 ([WHQVLRQ 3URJUDP YYYY 3DJH 3DJH Press the line button or function key that corresponds to your selection.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 5-7 5 Programming Codes Table 5–1 provides a quick reference to the programming codes for the system features. Table 5–1. Telephone Programming Codes Feature Account Code Entry Alarm Programming Code * Authorization Code Auto Answer All Auto Answer Intercom Auto Dial Inside (ext.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Table 5–1. Page 5-8 Continued Feature Coverage Cover inside and outside calls Cover outside calls only Receiver buttons Group Primary Secondary Sender buttons Coverage Off Coverage VMS Off Programming Code Data Status + ext. no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Table 5–1. Page 5-9 Continued Feature Group Calling ln-Queue Alarm button Calling group supervisor Member available Member unavailable Calling group members Sign in (Available) After-call work state (CMS only) Programming Code Group Page Auto Dial Button + paging group ext. no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Table 5–1.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Table 5–1. Continued Feature Saved Number Dial Send/Remove Message* Signal (manual) System Access buttons Assign buttons† SA (Default Ring) SA Originate Only Shared SA Change type (SA or Shared SA) Ring Voice System Speed Dial Timer Transfer Voice Announce to Busy On Off * † Page 5-11 Programming Code + ext. no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Using the List Feature Menu Page 5-12 5 You can use the List Feature menu to select a feature, instead of using a programming code. When you select /LVW)HDWXUH (or press ), the first screen of features appears as shown below.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension Page 5-13 5 Copy Extension The system manager uses the copy extension feature to copy an extension’s programmed buttons (with some exceptions) to one or more extensions. The features are individually programmed on an extension, creating a template that can then be copied to other extensions in the system.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension Table 5–2.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension Table 5–2.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension 5 Page 5-16 Table 5–3 shows the operator features than can be copied for operator consoles. QCC features cannot be copied. Table 5–3.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension Console Display/Instructions ! Page 5-17 Additional Information PC Save your entry. Select (QWHU. ! Specify the number of the extension to which you want to copy programming features.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Feature Quick Reference Page 5-18 5 The following feature descriptions provide a quick reference for using centralized telephone programming. 5 Account Code Entry Assign a button for account code entry.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-19 5 Auto Answer All Assign a button to direct calls to an answering device when the user is not available.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-20 5 Automatic Line Selection Select the order in which the system makes outside lines available to the user. NOTE: Your current Automatic Line Selection table is deleted immediately after you select this feature by either selecting $XWR/LQH6HO from the display or pressing . There is no way to cancel the operation.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-21 5 Callback With Automatic Callback turned on, the system retries calls to busy extensions or busy trunk pools. Assign a Selective Callback button to allow the system to retry calls to busy extensions or busy trunk pools on a call-by-call basis.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-22 5 Call Waiting With Call Waiting turned on, a user on a call will know that another call is waiting. The person at the extension hears one beep for a waiting inside call, two for an outside call.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-23 5 Coverage Assign a button to establish Coverage; senders’ calls are covered by receivers. Summary: Receiver Buttons–Primary, Secondary, Group 5 This procedure assigns primary, secondary, or group coverage receivers.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Summary: Coverage VMS Off Page 5-24 5 This procedure prevents outside calls from being sent to voice mail.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-25 5 Do Not Disturb Assign a button to prevent calls from ringing at the telephone.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Summary: Telephone Extension Status 1 and 2 Page 5-26 5 Telephones Single-line, analog multiline, MLX telephones Mode All Programmable by Users and system manager Programming Code ES1: ES2: Display Label (6 6WDWXV, (6 (6 5 Feature Button Use in conjunction with features that require dial codes.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-27 5 Group Calling Assign buttons to allow the calling group supervisor to monitor the number of calls in the queue or to change calling group members’ availability to take calls.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Group Page Auto Dial Button Page 5-28 5 Assign a button to allow the user to broadcast an announcement to individuals or groups using a speakerphone or loudspeaker.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-29 5 Summary: Headset Mute Assign a button to turn microphone operation on or off for both headset and handset. Telephones MLX telephones only Mode All Programmable by Users and system manager Programming Code Display Label +GVHW 0XWH 5 Summary: Headset Status Assign a button to activate headset operation.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-30 5 Messaging Assign a button to allow users to send, receive, and post messages.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-32 5 Night Service Assign a button to activate telephone operation after normal business hours.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-33 5 Park Zone Auto Dial Assign a button to allow DLC operators to hold a call at a specified extension or park zone.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-34 5 Pickup Assign buttons to allow users to answer calls that are ringing, parked, or on hold anywhere in the system. Summary: Pickup–General Use, Specific Extension, Specific Line 5 Telephones All Mode All Programmable by Users and system manager Programming Code General: Specific line or ext.: + line no./ext. no.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-35 5 Reminder Service Assign buttons to allow the system to make calls automatically at preset times and cancel reminder service calls and operator reminder calls that were not answered.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Summary: Ring Timing Options Page 5-36 5 Use this procedure to establish whether and how the individual lines or all lines ring at a telephone.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-37 5 Saved Number Dial Assign a button to selectively save the last number dialed and call that number again without manually redialing.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference System Access/Intercom Buttons Page 5-38 5 Assign Intercom or System Access buttons on telephones.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 5 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 5-39 5 System Speed Dial Assign a button to dial any 3-digit speed dial code. Summary: System Speed Dial 5 Telephones All Mode All Programmable by Users and system manager Programming Code + 3-digit code (600–729) + (QWHU Display Label 6\V6SHHG'O 5 Transfer Assign a button to access the host system Transfer feature.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 A Customer Support Information Support Telephone Number Page A-1 Customer Support Information A Support Telephone Number 1 A In the USA only, Lucent Technologies provides a toll-tree customer Helpline (1 800 628-2888) 24 hours a day. If you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system, call the Helpline, or your Lucent Technologies representative.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 A Customer Support Information Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information Page A-2 Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information 1 This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 A Customer Support Information FCC Notification and Repair Information Page A-3 If there are no directly terminated trunks, or if the only directly terminated facilities are personal lines, report the number AS5USA65646-PF-E. The REN (Ringer Equivalence Number) for all three systems is 1.5A.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 A Customer Support Information Installation and Operational Procedures Installation and Operational Procedures Page A-4 1 The manuals for your system contain information about installation and operational procedures. ■ Repair Instructions.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 A Customer Support Information DOC Notification and Repair Information Page A-5 This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded back to the Public Switched Telephone Network.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 A Customer Support Information Renseignements sur la notification du ministère des Communications du Canada Page A-6 Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 A Customer Support Information Renseignements sur la notification du ministère des Communications du Canada Page A-7 Les réparations de matériel homologué doivent être effectuées par un centre d’entretien canadien autorisé désigné par le fournisseur.
LISTED 538E TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe A prescrites dans le Règlement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère Communications du Canada. This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference reguations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 A Customer Support Information Security of Your System: Preventing Toll Fraud Security of Your System: Preventing Toll Fraud Page A-9 1 As a customer of a new telephone system, you should be aware that there is an increasing problem of telephone toll fraud.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 A Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A-10 To minimize the risk of unauthorized access to your communications system: ■ Use a nonpublished Remote Access number. ■ Assign access codes randomly to users on a need-to-have basis, keeping a log of all authorized users and assigning one code to one person. ■ Use random-sequence access codes, which are less likely to be easily broken.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 A Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Physical Security, Social Engineering, and General Security Measures Page A-11 1 Criminals called hackers may attempt to gain unauthorized access to your communications system and voice messaging system in order to use the system features.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 A Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A-12 ■ Any time a call appears to be suspicious, call the Lucent Technologies GBCS Fraud Intervention Center at 1 800 628-2888 (fraud intervention for System 25, PARTNER® and MERLIN® systems).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 A Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A-13 In Release 3.1 and later systems, default local tables are factory-assigned an FRL of 2. This simplifies the task of restricting extensions: the FRL for an extension merely needs to be changed from the default of 3. Each extension should be assigned the appropriate FRL to match its calling requirements.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 A Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Security Risks Associated with the Automated Attendant Feature of Voice Messaging Systems Page A-14 1 Two areas of toll fraud risk associated with the Automated Attendant feature of voice messaging systems are the following: ■ Pooled facility (line/trunk) access codes are translated to a menu prompt to allow Remote Access.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 A Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A-15 NOTE: In most cases these will be loop-start lines/trunks without reliable disconnect. The local telephone company will need to be involved to change the facilities used for RCF to ground start lines/trunks. Usually a charge applies for this change.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 A Customer Support Information Other Security Hints ■ Page A-16 The maximum length should be used for each barrier code, and should be changed periodically. Barrier codes, like passwords, should consist of a random, hard-to-guess sequence of digits. While MERLIN LEGEND Release 3.0 permits a barrier code of up to 11 digits, systems prior to Release 3.0 permit barrier codes of up to only four digits.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 A Customer Support Information Other Security Hints Page A-17 ■ Never distribute the office telephone directory to anyone outside the company; be careful when discarding it (shred the directory). ■ Never accept collect telephone calls. ■ Never discuss your telephone system’s numbering plan with anyone outside the company.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 A Customer Support Information Other Security Hints Establishing a Policy Page A-18 1 As a safeguard against toll fraud, follow these guidelines for your MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and voice messaging system: ■ Change passwords frequently (at least quarterly). Changing passwords routinely on a specific date (such as the first of the month) helps users to remember to do so.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 A Customer Support Information Other Security Hints Choosing Passwords Page A-19 1 Passwords should be the maximum length allowed by the system.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 A Customer Support Information Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability Page A-20 1 Lucent Technologies warrants to you, the customer, that your MERLIN LEGEND Communications System will be in good working order on the date Lucent Technologies or its authorized reseller delivers or installs the system, whichever is later (“Warranty Date”).
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 A Customer Support Information Remote Administration and Maintenance Page A-22 To reduce the risk of unauthorized access through Remote Administration and Maintenance, please observe the following procedures: ■ The System Administration and Maintenance capability of a Hybrid/PBX or Key system is protected by a password. — Change the default password immediately.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 B Menu Hierarchy Page B-1 B Menu Hierarchy B The system programming menu hierarchy details the sequence of menu screens that appear when you select the system programming options. The choice of an option on the first menu screen leads to either a second menu screen or a dataentry screen.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 C LED Displays Page C-1 LED Displays C C Table C–1 indicates LED status on the MLX-20L console. LED status is indicated on the LEDs next to the 20 buttons below the display area on the system programming console. LED status is simulated on the computer screen when you use SPM. Table C–2 indicates LED status on the DSS console. LED status is indicated on the red LED next to the 50 extension buttons.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 C LED Displays Page C-2 Table C–1.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 C LED Displays Page C-3 Table C–2.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 C LED Displays Page C-4 Table C–2.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 D General Feature Use and Telephone Programming General Feature Use Information General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Page D-1 D D This appendix contains information on the general use of features for the MLX, analog multiline, and single-line telephones. It covers telephone and operator features and the acceptable programming codes for each.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 D General Feature Use and Telephone Programming General Feature Use Information Programmed Buttons Page D-2 4 Any unlabeled line button on multiline telephones can be programmed with a feature for one-touch activation. See Tables D–1 through D–4 for additional information about programming features onto line buttons.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 D General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features Page D-3 4 Feature Codes Feature codes are 1-, 2-, and 3-digit codes that activate features. A feature code is used by first pressing the dedicated Feature button on MLX telephones, pressing a programmed Feature button on analog multiline telephones, or dialing on single-line telephones.
Prog Code 2-Line Feature Code Display 7-Line Display Account Code Entry code $FFW $FFRXQW&RGH Alarm* $ODUP $ODUP $O&ON $ODUP &ORFN $XWK $XWK &RGH Alarm Clock MLX10D/5D MLX28D MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog 20L 5 Line Multi. KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KP KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB Authorization Code Auto Answer All $XWR$QV $OO KPB Auto Answer Intercom $XWR$QV,FRP KPB Auto Dial Inside (ext.
Conference KPB KPB KPB &RQI &RQIHUHQFH B B B B KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB &RYHUDJH &RYHU,QVLGH 2Q &Y,QV 2II &RYHU,QVLGH 2II + ext. no. + ext. no. + ext. no. *URXS 3UPU\ 6HFQG *URXS 3ULPDU\ 6HFRQGDU\ &YRII &RYHUDJH2II + ext. no. Direct Voice Mail Directories Extension Directory (display only) Personal Directory (display only) System Directory (sys. prog.
Status 1 Status 2 Telephones (rooms or agents) Status Off Status 1 Status 2 Feature Button MLX10D/5D 23(6 (62II 2SHUDWRU(6 (62II 2SHUDWRU(6 (6 23(6 (6 23(6 (6 (6 (6 (6 (6 MLX28D MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog 20L 5 Line Multi. KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB 2SHUDWRU(6 (6 KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB + ext. no. )RUZG )RUZG + tel no. + ext. no.
Group Page Auto Dial Button Headset Options Auto Answer Hang Up† Mute (Headset/ Handset) Status † MLX28D MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog 20L 5 Line Multi. KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB group ext. no. + Hold KPB + Drop + DSS bt. 23(6 (6 2SHUDWRU(6 (6 + DSS bt.
Intercom buttons Assign buttons* ICOM (Default Ring) ICOM Originate Only Change button type Ring Language Choice English French Spanish Last Number Dial Messaging Leave Message After calling Without calling Cancel msg. left Message LED off Posted Message Send/Remove Msg† Receiving messages Delete Message‡ Next Message‡ Return Call‡ Scroll‡ ‡ KB KB KB KB KB 6\V$FF KB /DVW /DVW1XP'LDO 0VJV 0HVVDJHV /Y0VJ + ext no. + ext no. + ext no.
Night Service* Notify Send + ext. 1LJKW 1LJKW 6UYF 1WI\ 6HQG 1RWLI\ 6HQG 5HFY 5HFHLYH *US3J /GV3J *URXS 3DJH /RXGVSNU 3J 3DUN 3DUN + park 3UN=Q 3DUN =RQH no. + ext. Receive 7-Line Display MLX10D/5D MLX28D MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog 20L 5 Line Multi. KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB KPB no.
+ time + $ 6HW or 3 + ext. no.+ time + $ or 3 &DQFO + ext. no. Operator Set*† Cancel Operator Cancel† Missed† Ringing/Idle Line Preference On Off † /Q3UI 2Q /Q3UI 2II MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog 20L 5 Line Multi.
Send/Remove Message* Signal (manual) + ext. no. + ext. no. 7-Line Display 6DYH 6DYH1XP'LDO 6G0VJ 6HQG 5PY0VJ 6LJQO 6LJQDO System Access buttons Assign buttons† SA (Default Ring) SA Originate Only + primary Shared SA ext. no. MLX10D/5D MLX28D MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog 20L 5 Line Multi.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 D General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming Telephone Programming Page D-12 4 The following describes how to program features on MLX and analog multiline telephones. Because Personal Speed Dial is the only feature that single-line telephone users can program, general programming instructions for single-line telephones are not provided.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 D General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming Table D–2. Page D-13 Programming Analog Multiline Telephones Step Action 1 Remove the clear label cover from the phone: insert the end of a paper clip in the notch at the top of the cover. Label the button. Note: Skip this step if the feature is not programmed on a button.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 D General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming Table D–4. Page D-14 Programming MLX Telephones Using the Display Step Action 1 Remove the clear label cover from the telephone by pulling up on the tab that extends from the top of the cover. Label the button to be programmed. Note: Skip this step if the feature will not be programmed onto a button.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 D General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming Table D–4. Continued Step 4 Page D-15 Action Select the feature. If the feature name is on the display: Press the button next to or below the name of the feature to be programmed. If the feature name is not on the display: Press More. To move through the list of features page by page, Press More.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 D General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming Table D–5. Page D-16 Programming MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Telephones Step Action 1 Remove the clear label cover from the telephone by pulling up on the tab that extends from the top of the cover. Label the button to be programmed. Note: Skip this step if the feature will not be programmed onto a button.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 E Button Diagrams Page E-1 E Button Diagrams E This appendix contains the button diagrams for Hybrid/PBX, Key, and Behind Switch systems. 22 24 26 28 21 23 25 27 10 15 5 3 8 2 SA Orig. 1 Only SA Ring SA Ring 7 9 4 3 2 1 Figure E–1.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 E Button Diagrams Page E-2 Figure E–2. 13 16 12 15 11 14 5 10 4 9 3 8 2 SA Voice 7 1 SA Ring 6 MLX-16DP Telephone Button Diagram (Hybrid/PBX Mode) 5 10 4 9 3 8 2 SA Voice 7 1 SA Ring 6 5 10 Figure E–3.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 E Button Diagrams Page E-3 34 BUTTON 22 BUTTON 10 BUTTON 5 BUTTON Figure E–4.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 E Button Diagrams Page E-4 22 24 26 28 21 23 25 27 5 10 15 20 4 9 14 19 3 8 13 18 2 Icom Voice 7 12 17 1 Icom Ring 6 11 16 10 Key Mode: Up to 8 personal line buttons are assigned beginning at button 3. Figure E–5. Behind Switch Mode: One prime line button is assigned to button 3.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 E Button Diagrams Page E-5 5 10 4 9 3 8 2 Icom Voice 7 1 Icom Ring 6 5 10 Behind Switch Mode: One prime line is assigned to button 3 Figure E–7.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 E Button Diagrams Page E-6 34 BUTTON 22 BUTTON 10 BUTTON 5 BUTTON 5 10 11 23 4 9 12 24 3 8 13 25 Icom Voice 2 7 14 26 Icom Ring 1 6 15 27 16 28 17 29 18 30 19 31 20 32 21 33 22 34 Key Mode: Up to 8 Personal line buttons are assigned beginning at button 3. Figure E–8. Behind Switch Mode: One prime line button is assigned to button 3.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports Page F-1 Sample Reports F F This appendix includes samples of the print reports generated by the communications system. Table F-1 lists the system reports and the pages in this appendix where samples can be found. NOTE: The system’s Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) feature reports incoming and outgoing call details. Table F-1. Sample Report Pages For... See...
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports Page F-2 Table F–1. Sample Report Pages (Continued) For... See...
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Issue 1 February 1998 Sample Reports Page F-3 Table F–2.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Issue 1 February 1998 Sample Reports Page F-4 Table F–2. System Reports (Continued) Menu Option Report Name $OORZ/LVW7R Access to Allowed Lists 'LVDOORZ/VW Disallowed Lists 'LVDOORZ7R Access to Disallowed Lists $56 Automatic Route Selection ([W 'LUHFW Extension Directory 6\V 'LUHFW System Directory *URXS 3DJH Group Paging Description Lists numbered 0–7.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Issue 1 February 1998 Sample Reports Page F-5 Table F–2. System Reports (Continued) Menu Option Report Name ([W ,QIR Extension Information Description For each specified station (extension), type of equipment connected, features assigned, ESS supervisor status, and features assigned to each button. On this report, MLX-16DP telephones are reported as MLX-28D. As of Release 5.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports System Information Report Page F-7 System Information Report— Continued Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot # 1: # 2: # 3: # 4: # 5: # 6: # 7: # 8: # 9: #10: #11: #12: #13: #14: #15: #16: #17: 008 408 008 408 800 008 800 008 016 408 008 800 800 400 012 008 408 6 MLX GS/LS GS/LS-MLX CO-BRI (Ringing Frequency - 25 Hz.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports Dial Plan Report Page F-8 6 Dial Plan Report Print Menu Option: Sections: 'LDO 3ODQ Pools; Telephone Paging Zones; Direct Group Calling Group; Lines/Trunks; Stations DIAL PLAN FOR POOLS POOL.# 1: POOL.# 2: POOL.# 3: POOL.# 4: POOL.# 5: POOL.# 6: POOL.# 4: POOL.# 8: POOL.# 9: POOL.# 10: POOL.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports Dial Plan Report Page F-9 Dial Plan Report—Continued 6 DIAL PLAN FOR STATIONS STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN STN . . .
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports Dial Plan Report Page F-10 6 Dial Plan Report—Continued COMPLETE DIAL PLAN FOR STATIONS AND ADJUNCTS ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID . . .
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports GS/LS Trunk Information Report Page F-15 6 GS/LS Trunk Information Report Print Menu Option: 7UXQN ,QIR DQG /RRS *URXQG GS/LS TRUNK INFORMATION Trk 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 . .
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports General Trunk Information Report Page F-16 General Trunk Information Report Print Menu Option: 6 7UXQN ,QIR DQG *HQHUDO GENERAL TRUNK INFORMATION Trk SS/PP 801 2/ 1 802 2/ 2 803 2/ 3 804 2/ 4 805 4/ 1 806 4/ 2 807 4/ 3 808 4/ 4 809 5/ 1 810 5/ 2 811 5/ 3 812 5/ 4 813 5/ 5 814 5/ 6 815 5/ 7 816 5/ 8 817 6/ 1 . . . .
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports Switch 56 Data Information Report Page F-17 Switch 56 Data Information Report Print Menu Option: 6 7UXQN ,QIR DQG 6 'DWD Dial Plan Routing for Network Service Expected Digits: 3 Digits to Delete: 0 Digits to Add: 0 Trk 801 802 803 . . .
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports PRI Information Report Page F-19 6 PRI Information Report Print Menu Option: Sections: 35, ,QIR Network Selection, Special Service, Call-by-Call and Dial Plan Routing Tables; PRI Information NOTE: The B-Channels are printed in the order in which they are searched.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports PRI Information Report Page F-20 PRI Information Report—Continued 6 BchnlGrp #: 80 Channel ID: Slot: TestTelNum: NtwkServ: 11 ElecTandNtwk 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Line 825 826 827 . . .
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports Operator Information Report Page F-23 6 Operator Information Report Print Menu Option: Sections: 2SHU ,QIR Operator Positions; General Options; DSS Options; QCC Operator Options: QCC Call Types OPERATOR POSITIONS PORT ADDR.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports Allowed Lists Report Page F-25 6 Allowed Lists Report Print Menu Option: Sections: ALLOWED LISTS List : 0 Entry 0: Entry 1: Entry 2: Entry 3: Entry 4: Entry 5: Entry 6: Entry 7: Entry 8: Entry 9: . . .
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports Disallowed Lists Report Page F-27 Disallowed Lists Report Print Menu Option: Sections: 'LVDOORZ/VW Lists 1 through 7 DISALLOWED LISTS List : 0 Entry 0: Entry 1: Entry 2: Entry 3: Entry 4: Entry 5: Entry 6: Entry 7: Entry 8: Entry 9: . . .
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports Extension Directory Report Page F-30 6 Extension Directory Report ([W 'LUHFW Print Menu Option: EXTENSION DIRECTORY Port Addr Ext # Label 1/ 1 1/ 2 1/ 3 1/ 4 1/ 5 1/ 6 1/ 7 1/ 8 2/ 1 2/ 3 2/ 5 2/ 7 3/ 1 3/ 3 3/ 5 3/ 7 4/ 1 4/ 3 4/ 5 4/ 7 6/ 1 . . .
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports Extension Information Report Page F-33 6 Extension Information Report ([W ,QIR plus extension number Print Menu Option: EXTENSION INFORMATION Extn SS/PP Type 10 1/ 1 MLX-20L + 1 DSS CTI Link Pool Access Page Group Primary Coverage Secondary Coverage Coverage Group Group Coverers NS Groups Group Calling Member Pickup Groups Allowed Lists Disallowed Lists Restrictions ESS Sup.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 F Sample Reports Direct Group Calling Information Report Direct Group Calling Information Report Print Menu Option: Sections: Page F-36 6 *US &DOOLQJ Each programmed group DIRECT GROUP CALLING INFORMATION Group # : 782 Group Type : AutoLogout Call Distribution Type : CIRCULAR PryAnn No.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 G General System Programming Sequence Page G-1 General System Programming Sequence G G This appendix lists the basic procedures, in the order in which they must be performed, to program a new system. In some instances, you may need to rearrange the system planning forms to match this order.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 G General System Programming Sequence Basic System Operating Conditions Basic System Operating Conditions ■ Page G-2 G Select the system programming position. 6ZTUFN→63SPH 3PSU ■ Select the system language. More→/BOHVBHF→6ZTUFN/BOH ■ Select the system mode. 6ZTUFN→0PEF ■ Enable Automatic Maintenance Busy. 6ZTUFN→0BJOUFO%VTZ ■ Set the system time. 6ZTUFN→7JNF ■ Set the system date.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 G General System Programming Sequence Identify System Operator Positions Identify System Operator Positions ■ Page G-3 G Identify QCC system operator positions. 2QFSBUPS→3PTJUJPOT →4VFVFE &BMM ■ Identify DLC system operator positions. 2QFSBUPS→3PTJUJPOT →'JSFDU /JOF Lines and Trunks ■ G Specify type of trunk on 400 or 800 GL/LS module.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 G General System Programming Sequence Complex Lines Page G-4 Complex Lines ■ G Program DS1 trunks. /JOFT7SVOLT→/6 *6 '6 ■ Program tie lines. /JOFT7SVOLT→7,( /JOFT ■ Program DID trunks. /JOFT7SVOLT→',' ■ Program PRI trunks. /JOFT7SVOLT→35, ■ Program BRI trunks. /JOFT7SVOLT→%5, G Telephones Many system managers prefer to program auxiliary equipment before programming telephones.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 G General System Programming Sequence Auxiliary Equipment Auxiliary Equipment ■ Page G-5 G Program Music On Hold. $VY(RVJQ→0VTJD2O+PME ■ Program loudspeaker paging. $VY(RVJQ→/ETQLS 3H ■ Program a fax port. $VY(RVJQ→)BY ■ Identify the jack used for maintenance alarms. $VY(RVJQ→0BJOU$MBSNT ■ Program voice mail and automated attendant.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 H Programming Special Characters Single-Line Telephones Page H-1 Programming Special Characters H H This appendix provides the special characters used in dialing sequences for numbers dialed automatically, such as on Auto Dial buttons. The characters allowed depend on the type of telephone. Single-Line Telephones H Some dialing sequences need special characters.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 H Programming Special Characters Analog Multiline Telephones Page H-2 Analog Multiline Telephones 8 Some dialing sequences need special characters. For example, the user presses Hold to insert a Pause character after the dial-out code in a dialing sequence to allow the system to seize an outside line before dialing the number.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 H Programming Special Characters MLX-10 and MLX-5 Nondisplay Telephones MLX-10 and MLX-5 Nondisplay Telephones Page H-3 8 Some dialing sequences need special characters. For example, the user presses Hold to insert a Pause character after the dial-out code in a dialing sequence to allow the system to seize an outside line before dialing the number.
Issue 1 February 1998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 H Programming Special Characters MLX Display Telephones MLX Display Telephones Page H-4 8 Some dialing sequences need special characters. For example, the user presses Hold to insert a Pause character in a dialing sequence after a dial-out code to allow the system to seize an outside line before dialing the number.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-1 0 Glossary Italics GL The use of italics in the glossary denotes multiple usage of the italicized text throughout the glossary. Numerics 2B data Digital information carried by two B-channels for better performance and quality; the bit rate is twice that of one B-channel used alone.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-2 AMI (alternate mark inversion) Line coding format in which a binary one is represented by a positive or negative pulse, a binary zero is represented by no line signal, and subsequent binary ones must alternate in polarity; otherwise, a bipolar violation occurs. AMI is used in the DS1 interface. Analog data station See modem data station.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-3 Automated Attendant IS II/III, MERLIN LEGEND MAIL, and Lucent Technologies Attendant application that automatically answers incoming calls with a recorded announcement and directs callers to a department, an extension, or the system operator. Automated Document Delivery System See ADDS.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-4 B B8ZS (bipolar 8 zero substitution) Line-coding format that encodes a string of eight zeros in a unique binary sequence to detect bipolar violations. backup Procedure for saving a copy of system programming onto a floppy disk or memory card. See also restore.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-5 bit (binary digit) One unit of information in binary notation; it can have one of two values, zero or one. bit rate Speed at which bits are transmitted, usually expressed in bps. Also called “data rate.” blocking Condition in which end-to-end connections cannot be made on calls because of a full load on all possible services and facilities. See also glare.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-6 Call Management System See CMS. CAS (Call Accounting System) DOS- or UNIX System-based application that monitors and manages telecommunications costs. CAT (Call Accounting Terminal) Standalone unit with a built-in microprocessor and data buffer that provides simple call accounting at a low cost.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-7 clock synchronization When digital signals are transmitted over a communications link, the receiving end must be synchronized with the transmitting end to receive the digital signals without errors using clock synchronization. A system synchronizes itself by extracting a timing signal from an incoming digital stream.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-8 control unit Processor module, power supply module, other modules, carriers, and housing of the system. console Telephone and adjuncts (if any) at operator or system programmer extension. CONVERSANT Entry-level voice response application that automatically answers and routes calls and executes telephone transactions. conversion resource See modem pool.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-9 data communications equipment See DCE. data module A type of ISDN terminal adapter that acts as the DCE at a data workstation that communicates over high-speed digital facilities. data rate See bps. data station Special type of extension where data communications take place; includes DTE and DCE; sometimes a telephone is also part of a data station.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-10 Dialed Number Identification Service See DNIS. dial-out code Digit (usually a ) or digits dialed by telephone users to get an outside line. dial plan Numbering scheme for system extensions, lines, and trunks.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-11 display buttons Buttons on an MLX display telephone used to access the telephone’s display. DLC (Direct-Line Console) Telephone used by a system operator to answer outside calls (not directed to an individual or a group) and inside calls, transfer calls, make outside calls for users with outward calling restrictions, set up conference calls, and monitor system operation.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-12 E E&M signaling Trunk supervisory signaling, used between two communications systems, in which signaling information is transferred through two-state voltage conditions (on the Ear and Mouth leads) for analog applications and through two bits for digital applications. See also tie trunk.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-13 F facility Equipment (often a line/trunk) constituting a telecommunications path between the system and the telephone company central office (CO). Facility Restriction Level See FRL. factory setting Default state of a device or feature when an optional setting is not programmed by the user or system manager.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-14 frequency generator See ring generator. FRL (Facility Restriction Level) Calling restriction type that restricts calls to certain specified ARS and UDP routes. FX (Foreign exchange) Central office (CO) other than the one that is providing local access to the public telephone network. General Purpose Adapter See GPA.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-15 Home screen Display normally shown on an MLX display telephone; shows time, date, and call information, and shows when some features are in use. host Telephone company or other switch providing features and services to the system users, usually when the system is operating in Behind Switch mode.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-16 Intuity CONVERSANT Voice response application that automatically answers and routes calls and executes telephone transactions. I/O device (input/output device) Equipment that can be attached to a computer internally or externally for managing a computer system’s input and output of information.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-17 L LAN (local area network) Arrangement of interconnected personal computers or terminals, sometimes accessing a host computer, sometimes sharing resources such as files and printers. LDN (Listed Directory Number) LED (light-emitting diode) Semiconductor device that produces light when voltage is applied; light on a telephone.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-18 Lucent Technologies Attendant Application with equipment that connects to one or more tip/ring (T/R) extension jacks and automatically answers incoming calls with a recorded announcement; directs calls in response to touch tones. Magic on Hold A Lucent Technologies Music On Hold enhancement that promotes a company’s products or services.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-19 modem Device that converts digital data signals to analog signals for transmission over a telephone line, and analog signals received on a telephone line to digital signals. modem data station A type of data station that includes a modem as its DCE.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-20 N network Configuration of communications devices and software connected for information interchange. network interface Hardware, software, or both that links two systems in an interconnected group of systems, for example, between the local telephone company and a PBX.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-21 out-of-band signaling Signaling that uses the same path as voice-frequency transmission and in which the signaling is outside the band used for voice frequencies. parity The addition of a bit to a bit string so that the total number of ones is odd or even, used to detect and correct transmission errors.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-22 power supply module Device that directs electricity to modules and telephones on the system. One power supply module is needed for each carrier, and an auxiliary power unit is added if needed. PRI (Primary Rate Interface) Standard interface that specifies the protocol used between two or more communications systems.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-23 Q QCC (Queued Call Console) MLX-20L telephone used by a system operator in Hybrid/PBX mode only.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-24 S SAA (Supplemental Alert Adapter) Device that permits alerting equipment to be connected to an analog multiline telephone jack so that people working in noisy or remote areas of a building can be alerted to incoming calls. SA buttons Telephone buttons that provide access to both inside and outside calls.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-25 star configuration A private network arrangement where either three or more communications systems are connected with one system acting as the hub system. See also series configuration. station See extension. station jack See extension jack. Station Message Detail Recording See SMDR. Supplemental Alert Adapter See SAA. switch See communications system.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-26 T T1 Type of digital transmission facility that in North America transmits at the DS1 rate of 1.544 Mbps. T1-emulated data A T1 tie trunk programmed for S56DATA for use by data calls at speeds up to 56 kbps. These trunks may be used for tandem and non-tandem operation. T1-emulated voice A T1 tie trunk programmed for Tie-PBX or Tie-Toll for use by voice calls.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-27 trunk Telecommunications path between the communications system and the telephone company central office (CO) or another switch. Often used synonymously with line. trunk jack See line/trunk jack. trunk pool See pool. TSAPI Telephony Services Application Programming Interface. An application programming interface that allows computer telephony applications to be used.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-28 UPS (uninterruptible power supply) Device that connects to the system to provide 117 VAC to the equipment when the commercial power source fails. VAC (alternating-current voltage) VDC (direct-current voltage) VMI (voice messaging interface) An enhanced tip/ring port.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Glossary Page GL-29 W WATS (Wide Area Telecommunications Service) Service that allows calls to certain areas for a flat-rate charge based on expected usage. wink-start tie trunk Tie trunk on which the originating end transmits an off-hook signal and waits for the remote end to send back a signal (a wink) that it is ready for transmission.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Index Page IN-2 Assigning Allowed Lists, 3-232, 4-335 Disallowed Lists, 3-237, 4-336 Intercom buttons, 3-75, 4-255 System Access (SA) buttons, 3-75, 4-255 trunks or pools, 4-250 AUDIX Voice Power, 1-51, 1-52 Authorization Codes, 1-59, 3-88, 3-115, 3-217, 4-285 Auto Dial button, 1-53 autoexec.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.0 System Programming 555-660-111 Issue 1 February 1998 Index Page IN-13 Q Queue Over Threshold , 3-40, 4-293 Queued Call Console (QCC) hold return, 3-36 operator positions, 3-26, 4-27 operator to receive call types, 4-294 operator to receive calls, 3-46, 4-58 optional features, 3-35, 4-289 queue priority level, 4-54 R RAM requirements, 2-2 Recall timer, 3-230, 4-333 Redirect outside calls to unassigned extension numbers, 3-224, 4-331 Release 1.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.
